1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. AutomationDirect Manuals
  4. Controller
  5. DL205
  6. User manual

AutomationDirect DL205 User Manual

Plc
Hide thumbs Also See for DL205:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Table Of Contents
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual See also: Manual
DL205 PLC User Manual
Volume 1 of 2
Manual Number: D2-USER-M

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the DL205 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for AutomationDirect DL205

Summary of Contents for AutomationDirect DL205

  • Page 1 DL205 PLC User Manual Volume 1 of 2 Manual Number: D2-USER-M...
  • Page 2 Notes...
  • Page 3 This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. AutomationDirect we constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to make changes to the products and/or publications at any time without notice and without any obligation.
  • Page 4 Esta publicación puede contener referencias a productos producidos y/u ofrecidos por otras compañías. Los nombres de las compañías y productos pueden tener marcas registradas y son propiedad única de sus respectivos dueños. Automationdirect.com, renuncia cualquier interés propietario en las marcas y nombres de otros.
  • Page 5 («activités à risque élevé»). La société AutomationDirect nie toute garantie expresse ou implicite d’aptitude à l’emploi en ce qui a trait aux activités à risque élevé.
  • Page 6 Notes:...
  • Page 7 DL205 PLC USER MANUAL Please include the Manual Number and the Manual Issue, both shown below, when communicating with Technical Support regarding this publication. Manual Number: D2-USER-M Issue: 4th Edition, Rev. D Issue Date: 10/17 Publication History Issue Date Description of Changes...
  • Page 8 Notes...

  • Page 9: Table Of Contents

    The Purpose of this Manual 1–2 Where to Begin 1–2 Supplemental Manuals 1–2 Technical Support 1–2 Conventions Used 1–3 Key Topics for Each Chapter 1–3 DL205 System Components 1–4 CPUs 1–4 Bases 1–4 I/O Configuration 1–4 I/O Modules 1–4 DL205 System Diagrams 1–5 Programming Methods 1–7...
  • Page 10 Solid State Input Sensors 2–19 Solid State Output Loads 2–19 Relay Output Guidelines 2–21 Relay Outputs – Transient Suppression for Inductive Loads in a Control System 2–21 I/O Modules Position, Wiring, and Specification 2–26 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 11 2–41 D2–32TD1, DC Output 2–42 D2–32TD2, DC Output 2–42 F2–08TA, AC Output 2–43 D2–08TA, AC Output 2–43 D2–12TA, AC Output 2–44 D2–04TRS, Relay Output 2–45 D2–08TR, Relay Output 2–46 F2–08TR, Relay Output 2–47 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 12 Changing Modes in the DL205 PLC 3–13 Mode of Operation at Power-up 3–13 Using Battery Backup 3–14 DL230 and DL240 3–14 DL250-1 and DL260 3–14 Battery Backup 3–14 Auxiliary Functions 3–15 Clearing an Existing Program 3–16 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 13 Reading Inputs from Specialty I/O 3–31 Service Peripherals 3–31 CPU Bus Communication 3–32 Update Clock/Calendar, Special Relays, Special Registers 3–32 Writing Outputs 3–32 Writing Outputs to Specialty I/O 3–33 Diagnostics 3–33 Application Program Execution 3–34 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 14 3–55 DL260 Memory Map 3–56 X Input/Y Output Bit Map 3–57 Control Relay Bit Map 3–59 Stage Control/Status Bit Map 3–63 Timer and Counter Status Bit Maps 3–65 Remote I/O Bit Map 3–66 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 15 Ethernet Remote Master Hardware Configuration 4–18 Installing the ERM Module 4–19 Ethernet Base Controller, H2-EBC(100)(-F) 4–22 Install the EBC Module 4–23 Set the Module ID 4–23 Insert the EBC Module 4–23 Network Cabling 4–24 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 16 Modbus Read from Network (MRX) 4–48 MRX Slave Memory Address 4–49 MRX Master Memory Addresses 4–49 MRX Number of Elements 4–49 MRX Exception Response Buffer 4–49 Modbus Write to Network (MWX) 4–50 viii DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 17 5–8 Boolean Stack 5–8 Immediate Boolean 5–9 Boolean Instructions 5–10 Comparative Boolean 5–27 Immediate Instructions 5–33 Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions 5–41 Using Timers 5–41 Timer Example Using Discrete Status Bits 5–43 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 18 Network Instructions 5–193 Message Instructions 5–197 Modbus RTU Instructions (DL260) 5–205 Modbus Read from Network (MRX) 5–205 Modbus Write to Network (MWX) 5–208 ASCII Instructions (DL260) 5–211 Intelligent Box (IBox) Instructions (DL250-1/DL260) 5-230 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 19 6–12 Timed Drum with Discrete Outputs (DRUM) 6–12 Event Drum (EDRUM) 6–14 Handheld Programmer Drum Mnemonics 6–16 Masked Event Drum with Discrete Outputs (MDRMD) 6–19 Masked Event Drum with Word Output (MDRMW) 6–21 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. C...
  • Page 20 Stage Program Organization 7–15 How Instructions Work Inside Stages 7–16 Using a Stage as a Supervisory Process 7–17 Stage Counter 7–17 Unconditional Outputs 7–18 Power Flow Transition Technique 7–18 Parallel Processing Concepts 7–19 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 21 Reset Windup Protection 8–10 Freeze Bias 8–11 Adjusting the Bias 8–11 Step Bias Proportional to Step Change in SP 8–12 Eliminating Proportional, Integral or Derivative Action 8–12 Velocity Form of the PID Equation 8–12 xiii DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 22 How to Change Loop Modes 8–54 Operator Panel Control of PID Modes 8–55 PLC Modes Effect on Loop Modes 8–55 Loop Mode Override 8–55 PV Analog Filter 8–56 Creating an Analog Filter in Ladder Logic 8–57 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 23 8–76 Glossary of PID Loop Terminology 8–78 Bibliography 8–80 Chapter 9: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 9–1 Hardware Maintenance 9–2 Standard Maintenance 9–2 Air Quality Maintenance 9–2 Low Battery Indicator 9–2 CPU Battery Replacement 9–2 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 24 Electrical Noise Problems 9–17 Reducing Electrical Noise 9–17 Machine Startup and Program Troubleshooting 9–18 Syntax Check 9–18 Duplicate Reference Check 9–19 TEST-PGM and TEST-RUN Modes 9–20 Special Instructions 9–22 Run Time Edits 9–24 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 25 AUX 52 Display/Change Calendar A–7 AUX 53 Display Scan Time A–8 AUX 54 Initialize Scratchpad A–8 AUX 55 Set Watchdog Timer A–8 AUX 56 CPU Network Address A–8 AUX 57 Set Retentive Ranges A–9 xvii DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 26 Introduction C–2 V-Memory Data Registers C–2 V-Memory Bit Registers C–2 How to Read the Tables C–2 Boolean Instructions C–3 Comparative Boolean Instructions C–4 Bit of Word Boolean Instructions C–13 Immediate Instructions C–14 xviii DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 27 Equal Relays for Multi-step Presets with Up/Down Counter #1 / DL230 (for use with a Counter Interface Module) D–4 DL240/DL250-1/DL260 CPU Special Relays D–5 Startup and Real-Time Relays D–5 CPU Status Relays D–5 System Monitoring Relays D–6 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 28 Real (Floating Point) Numbering System H–5 BCD/Binary/Decimal/Hex/Octal -What is the Difference? H–6 Data Type Mismatch H–7 Signed vs. Unsigned Integers H–8 AutomationDirect.com Products and Data Types H–9 DirectLOGIC PLCs H–9 C-more/C-more Micro-Graphic Panels H–9 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 29 Internal Enclosure Grounding Equi–potential Grounding Communications and Shielded Cables Analog and RS232 Cables Shielded Cables within Enclosures Analog Modules and RF Interference Network Isolation DC Powered Versions Items Specific to the DL205 I-10 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 30 Table of Contents Notes xxii DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 31 In This Chapter... Introduction ................1–2 Conventions Used ..............1–3 DL205 System Components ............1–4 Programming Methods ..............1–7 DirectLOGIC™ Part Numbering System ........1–8 Quick Start for PLC Validation and Programming .......1–10 Steps to Designing a Successful System ........1–13...

  • Page 32: Chapter 1: Getting Started

    If you are a new DL205 customer, we suggest you read this manual completely to understand the wide variety of features in the DL205 family of products. We believe you will be pleasantly surprised with how much you can accomplish with our products.

  • Page 33: Conventions Used

    Key Topics for Each Chapter The beginning of each chapter will list the key topics HAPTER Getting Started that can be found in that chapter. In This Chapter... General Information ..............1-2 Specifications ................1-4 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 34: Dl205 System Components

    Operation. Bases Four base sizes are available: 3, 4, 6 and 9 slot. The DL205 PLCs use bases that can be expanded. The part numbers for these bases end with –1. These bases have a connector for local expansion located on the right end of the base. They can serve in local, local expansion and remote I/O configurations.

  • Page 35: Dl205 System Diagrams

    Chapter 1: Getting Started DL205 System Diagrams The diagram below shows the major components and configurations of the DL205 system. The next two pages show specific components for building your system. Simple Motion Control Machine Packaging Elevators Control Conveyors Flexible solutions in one package...
  • Page 36 4CH INPUT Handheld Programmer Remote Masters 8CH INPUT PLUS with Built-in RLL 2CH OUTPUT Remote Slaves Direct SOFT Programming 8CH OUTPUT Communications for Windows 4 IN/2 OUT Temperature Input 8 IN/4 OUT Filler Module DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 37: Programming Methods

    RLL and Stage. DirectSOFT Programming for Windows The DL205 can be programmed with one of the most advanced programming packages in the industry ––DirectSOFT5. DirectSOFT5 is a Windows-based software package that supports many Windows features you already know, such as cut and paste between applications, point and click editing, viewing and editing multiple application programs at the same time, etc.

  • Page 38: Directlogic™ Part Numbering System

    DL405 Product family D4/F4 Number of points 04/08/12/16/32/64 Input Output Combination Either Relay Current Sinking Current Sourcing Current Sinking/Sourcing High Current Isolation Fast I/O Denotes a differentiation between –1, –2, –3, –4 similar modules DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 39 F4– – R CoProcessors and ASCII BASIC Modules DL205 Product family D2/F2 DL305 Product family D3/F3 DL405 Product family D4/F4 CoProcessor ASCII BASIC 64K memory 128K memory 512K memory Radio modem Telephone modem DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 40: Quick Start For Plc Validation And Programming

    It is only intended to provide a general picture of what is needed to get your system powered up. Step 1: Unpack the DL205 Equipment Unpack the DL205 equipment and verify you have the parts necessary to build this demonstration system. The minimum parts needed are as follows: • Base •...
  • Page 41 Wire the input module, X0, to the toggle switch and 24VDC auxiliary power supply on the CPU terminal strip as shown. Chapter 2, Installation, Wiring, and Specifications, provides a list of I/O wiring guidelines. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 1-11...
  • Page 42 PLC. If using an HPP, the PGM indicator should be illuminated on the HPP. Enter the following keystrokes on the HPP: NOTE: It is not necessary for you to configure the I/O for this system since the DL205 CPUs automatically examine any installed modules and establish the correct configuration.

  • Page 43: Steps To Designing A Successful System

    See Chapter 4 for more information. Step 4: Determine the I/O Module Specifications and Wiring Characteristics Many different I/O modules are available with the DL205 system. Chapter 2 provides the specifications and wiring diagrams for the discrete I/O modules.
  • Page 44 Chapter 1: Getting Started Step 6: Review the Programming Concepts The DL205 provides four main approaches to solving the application program, including the PID loop task depicted in the next figure. • RLL diagram style programming is the best tool for solving boolean logic and general CPU register/ accumulator manipulation.
  • Page 45 IrIng pecIfIcatIons In This Chapter: Safety Guidelines................2–2 Mounting Guidelines.................2–5 Installing DL205 Bases..............2–10 Installing Components in the Base..........2–12 Base Wiring Guidelines..............2–13 I/O Wiring Strategies................2–14 I/O Modules Position, Wiring, and Specification.......2–26 Glossary of Specification Terms............2–51...

  • Page 46: Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring And Specifications

    • Local and State Agencies — many local and state governments have additional requirements above and beyond those described in the NEC Handbook. Check with your local Electrical Inspector or Fire Marshall office for information. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 47: Three Levels Of Protection

    Use E-Stop and Master Relay Master Power On Guard E STOP Relay Limit Guard Limit Switch Emergency Stop Master Relay Contacts Output Master Module Relay Arbor Contacts To disconnect output module power DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 48: Emergency Power Disconnect

    WARNING: This equipment is designed for use in Pollution Degree 2 environments (installed within an enclosure rated at least IP54). WARNING: Transient suppression must be provided to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by 140%. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 49: Mounting Guidelines

    (Mounting Hole) (Component Width) Base Unit) Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters 3-slot 6.77 6.41 7.24 4-slot 7.99 7.63 7.04 8.46 6-slot 10.43 10.07 9.48 10.90 9-slot 14.09 13.74 13.14 14.56 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 50: Panel Mounting And Layout

    Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications Panel Mounting and Layout It is important to design your panel properly to help ensure the DL205 products operate within their environmental and electrical limits. The system installation should comply with all appropriate electrical codes and standards. It is important the system also conforms to the operating standards for the application to ensure proper performance.

  • Page 51: Enclosures

    Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications 5. The ground terminal on the DL205 base must be connected to a single point ground. Use copper stranded wire to achieve a low impedance. Copper eye lugs should be crimped and soldered to the ends of the stranded wire to ensure good surface contact.

  • Page 52: Environmental Specifications

    Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications that generally apply to the DL205 system (CPU, Bases, I/O Modules). The ranges that vary for the Handheld Programmer are noted at the bottom of this chart. I/O module operation may fluctuate depending on the ambient temperature and your application.

  • Page 53: Marine Use

    • These bases are intended to be installed within an enclosure rated at least IP54. • Provisions should be made to prevent the rated voltage being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40%. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 54: Installing Dl205 Bases

    • Available power budget Mounting the Base All I/O configurations of the DL205 may use any of the base configurations. The bases are secured to the equipment panel or mounting location using four M4 screws in the corner tabs of the base. The full mounting dimensions are given in the previous section on Mounting Guidelines.

  • Page 55: Using Mounting Rails

    Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications Using Mounting Rails The DL205 bases can also be secured to the cabinet using mounting rails. You should use rails that conform to DIN EN standard 50 022. Refer to our catalog for a complete line of DIN- rail, DINnectors and DIN-rail mounted apparatus.

  • Page 56: Installing Components In The Base

    DL205 base WARNING: Minimize the risk of electrical shock, personal injury, or equipment damage. Always disconnect the system power before installing or removing any system component. 2-12 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 57: Base Wiring Guidelines

    Base Wiring 110/220 VAC Base T erminal Strip The diagrams show the terminal connections located on the power supply of the DL205 bases. The base terminals can accept up to 16 85 – 264 VAC AWG. You may be able to use larger wiring depending on the type of wire used, but 16 AWG is the recommended size.

  • Page 58: I/O Wiring Strategies

    Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications I/O Wiring Strategies The DL205 PLC system is very flexible and will work in many different wiring configurations. By studying this section before actual installation, you can probably find the best wiring strategy for your application. This will help to lower system cost, wiring errors, and avoid safety problems.

  • Page 59: Powering I/O Circuits With The Auxiliary Supply

    +24VDC auxiliary supply. All AC powered and 125VDC DL205 bases feature the internal auxiliary supply. If input devices AND output loads need +24VDC power, the auxiliary supply may be able to power both circuits as shown in the following diagram.

  • Page 60: Powering I/O Circuits Using Separate Supplies

    DL205 PLC Power Input Input Module Output Module Auxiliary Input Module Output Module +24VDC Inputs Com. Outputs Com. Supply Inputs Com. Outputs Com. – Load Loads Input Loads Load Supply Supply Supply 2-16 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 61: Sinking / Sourcing Concepts

    Sinking Input Sinking Output Input Output Load Input Output Sensing Switch – – Common Common Sourcing Input Sourcing Output Common Common Input Output Sensing Switch – – Input Output Load DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-17...
  • Page 62 This is especially important in output circuits, where heavier gauge wire is sometimes necessary on commons. Most DL205 input and output modules group their I/O points into banks that share a common return path. The best indication of I/O common grouping is on the wiring label, such as the one shown to the right.

  • Page 63: Connecting Dc I/O To "Solid State" Field Devices

    This type of connection is usually made to carry a low-level control signal, not to send DC power to an actuator. Several of the DL205 DC output modules are the sinking type. This means that each DC output provides a path to ground when it is energized. In the following circuit, the PLC output point sinks current to the output common when energized.
  • Page 64 DC sourcing output module. The Darlington NPN stage will have about 1.5 V ON-state saturation, but this is not a problem with low-current solid-state loads. PLC DC Sourcing Output +DC pwr Common Field Device input Output (sourcing) Input (sinking) Supply – Ground 2-20 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 65: Relay Output Guidelines

    Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications Relay Output Guidelines Several output modules in the DL205 I/O family feature relay outputs: D2–04TRS, D2–08TR, D2–12TR, D2–08CDR, F2–08TR and F2–08TRS. Relays are best for the following applications: • Loads that require higher currents than the solid-state outputs can deliver •...
  • Page 66 40V by the Zener diode. While the PLC will probably tolerate repeated transients in this range for some time, the 40V is still beyond the module’s peak output voltage rating of 30V. 2-22 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 67 Additional transient suppression should be used in both these examples. If you are unable to measure the transients generated by the connected loads of your control system, using additional transient suppression on all inductive loads would be the safest practice. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-23...
  • Page 68 784-4C-SKT-1 socket module shown below. If an add-on flyback diode is not available for your inductive load, an easy way to add one is to use AutomationDirect’s DN-D10DR-A diode terminal block, a 600VDC power diode mounted in a slim DIN rail housing.
  • Page 69 NOT conduct at the supply voltage, while allowing a safe margin. AutomationDirect’s ZL-TSD8-24 transorb module is a good choice for 24VDC circuits. It is a bank of 8 uni-directional 30V TVS diodes. Since they are uni-directional, be sure to observe the polarity during installation.

  • Page 70: I/O Modules Position, Wiring, And Specification

    I/O Modules Position, Wiring, and Specification Slot Numbering The DL205 bases each provide different numbers of slots for use with the I/O modules. You may notice the bases refer to 3-slot, 4-slot, etc. One of the slots is dedicated to the CPU, so you always have one less I/O slot.

  • Page 71: Special Placement Considerations For Analog Modules

    Color Coding of I/O Modules The DL205 family of I/O modules have a color coding scheme to help you quickly identify if a module is either an input module, output module, or a specialty module. This is done through a color bar indicator located on the front of each module.

  • Page 72: Wiring The Different Module Connectors

    Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications Wiring the Different Module Connectors There are two types of module connectors for the DL205 I/O. Some modules have normal screw terminal connectors. Other modules have connectors with recessed screws. The recessed screws help minimize the risk of someone accidentally touching active wiring.

  • Page 73: I/O Wiring Checklist

    Refer to our catalog for a complete line of DINnectors, DIN-rail mounted fuse blocks. DINnector External Fuses (DIN rail mounted Fuses) DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-29...

  • Page 74: D2-08Nd3, Dc Input

    24 VDC Sink Internal module circuitry Internal module circuitry D2--08ND3 INP UT INP UT To LE D To LE D Optical Optical Is olator Is olator Sink Sink Source Source 12--24VDC 24 VDC 2-30 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 75: D2-32Nd3, Dc Input

    Sink 2 VDC Internal module circuitry COM III CIII Source CIII INP UT To Logic Sink 24VDC Optical COM IV Is olator Source Sink Source 24 VDC 22--26VDC 4--6mA CLAS S 2 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-31...

  • Page 76: D2-32Nd3-2, Dc Input

    Status Indicator Module activity LED Weight 2.1 oz. (60g) Connector sold separately. See Terminal Blocks and Wiring for wiring options. Sink 5-15VDC Source Sink 5-15VDC Source Sink 5-15VDC Source Sink 5-15VDC Source 2-32 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 77: D2-08Na-1, Ac Input

    C ˚ 122131 F ˚ Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F ) D2--08NA--1 Internally 110 VAC connected 80-132VAC 10-20mA 50/60Hz Internal module circuitry D2--08NA-1 INP UT To LE D Optical Is olator Line 110 VAC DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-33...

  • Page 78: D2-08Na-2, Ac Input

    2.5 oz. (70g) Derating Chart Points Internally 220VAC connected 50 55 C ˚ 122131 F ˚ Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F ) Internal module circuitry INP UT To LE D Optical Is olator 220VAC 2-34 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 79: D2-16Na, Ac Input

    Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F ) D2--16NA F 2--08SI M 110 VAC 80- - 132VAC 10- - 20mA > 50/60Hz 110 VAC Internal module circuitry D2--16NA INP UT To LE D Optical Is olator 110 VAC DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-35...

  • Page 80: D2-04Td1, Dc Output

    60 times per minute. To convert this to duty cycle percentage use: (duration x cycles)/60. In this example, (60 x .1)/60 = .1, or 10% duty cycle. 24VDC To LE D Output D2--04TD1 6.3A 12--24 Optical Is olator Common Other Circuits 2-36 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 81: D2-08Td1, Dc Output

    Points 12- -24 50 55 C ˚ 122131 F ˚ Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F ) D2--08TD1 12--24VDC Internally connected 10.2- - 26.4VDC 0.2mA-0.3A Internal module circuitry Optical OUTP UT Is olator D2--08TD1 12--24VDC DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-37...

  • Page 82: D2-16Td1-2, Dc Output

    Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F ) D2--16TD1--2 10.2- - 26.4 VDC 0.1A CLASS2 24VDC 12- -24VDC Internally connected Internal module circuitry 24VDC Optical Is olator OUTP UT 12--24 * Can also be used with 5VDC supply 2-38 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 83: F2-16Td1(2)P, Dc Output With Fault Protection

    Turn the output (Y bit) off or power cycle the PLC Over load current NOTE 1: Open load detection can be disabled by removing the jumper switch J6 on the module PC board. Continued on next two pages. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-39...

  • Page 84: F2-16Td1P, Dc Output With Fault Protection

    When the A/B switch is in the A position, 12–24 the LEDs display the output status of the module’s first 8 output points. Positon B displays the output status of the mod- ule’s second group of 8 output points. 2-40 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 85: F2-16Td2P, Dc Output With Fault Protection

    When the A/B switch is in the A position, the LEDs display the output status of the module’s first 8 output points. Positon B OUTPUT displays the output status of the mod- ule’s second group of 8 output points. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-41...

  • Page 86: D2-32Td1, Dc Output

    20–28 VDC max. Connector sold separately. External DC Power Required 120mA (all points on) See Terminal Blocks and Wiring for wiring options. Connector sold separately. See Terminal Blocks and Wiring for wiring options. 2-42 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 87: F2-08Ta, Ac Output

    Removable; D2-8IOCON Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-8IOCON Status Indicator Logic side Status Indicator Logic side Weight 2.8 oz. (80g) Weight 3.5 oz. 1 per common, 6.3 A slow blow, Fuses Fuses None non-replaceable DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-43...

  • Page 88: D2-12Ta, Ac Output

    Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F ) n is the starting address 15- - 132VAC 10mA- - 0.3A 15--132 VAC 50/60 Hz Internal module circuitry OUTP UT Optical Is olator To LE D 15--132 VAC 3.15A 15--132 D2--12TA 2-44 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 89: D2-04Trs, Relay Output

    Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F ) D2--04TR S 5-240VAC 4A50/60Hz 5- - 30VDC 10mA- - 4A Internal module circuitry 5--30 VDC 5--240 VAC OUTP UT To LE D 6.3A 5--30 VDC 5--240 VAC D2--04TR S DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-45...

  • Page 90: D2-08Tr, Relay Output

    5--30 VDC 5- - 30VDC Internally 5mA- - 1A 122131 F ˚ 5--240 VAC connected Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F ) Internal module circuitry OUTP UT To LE D D2--08TR 6.3A 5--30 VDC 5--240 VAC 2-46 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 91: F2-08Tr, Relay Output

    100k Minimum Load Current 10 mA @ 12 VDC 1) Contact life may be extended beyond those values shown with the use of arc suppression techniques described in the DL205 User 10A/point (subject to derating) Max Load Current (resistive) Manual. Since these modules have no leakage current, they do not Max of 10A/common have built-in snubber.

  • Page 92: F2-08Trs, Relay Output

    1) Contact life may be extended beyond those values shown with Minimum Load Current 10mA @ 12VDC the use of arc suppression techniques described in the DL205 User Manual. Since these modules have no leakage current, they do not Max Load Current (resistive)

  • Page 93: D2-12Tr, Relay Output

    5--240 VAC Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F ) 5- - 240VAC 1.5A50/60Hz 5- - 30VDC 5mA- - 1.5A Internal module circuitry OUTP UT 5--30 VDC 5--240 VAC To LE D 5--30 VDC 5--240 VAC D2--12TR DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-49...

  • Page 94: D2-08Cdr 4 Pt., Dc Input / 4Pt., Relay Output

    Is olator Sink Sink Source 24VDC Internal module circuitry OUTP UT 5- - 240VAC 1A50/60Hz 5- - 30VDC 5mA- - 1A To LE D 6.3A 5--30 VDC 5--30 VDC 5--240 VAC 5--240 VAC 2-50 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 95: Glossary Of Specification Terms

    Some output modules require external power for the output circuitry. ON Voltage Drop Sometimes called “saturation voltage,” it is the voltage measured from an output point to its common terminal when the output is ON at maximum load. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-51...
  • Page 96 AC circuits. Base Power Required Power from the base power supply is used by the DL205 input modules and varies between different modules. The guidelines for using module power are explained in the power budget configuration section in Chapter 4–7.
  • Page 97 Memory Map ................3–37 DL230 System V-memory ............3–41 DL240 System V-memory ............3–43 DL250–1 System V-memory (DL250 also) .........3–46 DL260 System V-memory ............3–49 DL205 Aliases ................3–52 DL230 Memory Map ..............3–53 DL240 Memory Map ..............3–54 DL250–1 Memory Map (DL250 also) .........3–55 DL260 Memory Map ..............3–56 X Input/Y Output Bit Map ............3–57...

  • Page 98: Chapter 3: Cpu Specifications And Operations

    3, 4, 6, or 9 slot bases. All I/O modules in the DL205 family will work with any of the CPUs. The DL205 CPUs offer a wide range of processing power and program instructions. All offer RLL and Stage program instructions (See Chapter 5).

  • Page 99: Dl250-1 Cpu Features

    DL250–1. The bottom port is a 15–pin RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 port. It will interface with DirectSOFT (version 4.0 or later), operator interfaces, and provides DirectNet, Modbus RTU Master/Slave connections. Port 2 also supports ASCII IN/OUT instructions. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 100: Cpu General Specifications

    V– slaves using V– 896 by CPU) memory and bit–of– memory and bit–of– word instructions) word instructions I/O Module Point Density 4/8/12/16/32 4/8/12/16/32 4/8/12/16/32 4/8/12/16/32 Slots per Base 3/4/6/9 3/4/6/9 3/4/6/9 3/4/6/9 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 101: Cpu Base Electrical Specifications

    None 300mA max. 300mA max. Fusing (internal to base power Non–replaceable 2A @ 250V Non–replaceable 3.15 A @ Non–replaceable 2A @ 250V slow blow fuse 250V slow blow fuse slow blow fuse supply) DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 102: Cpu Hardware Setup

    Cables are available that allow you to quickly and easily connect a Handheld Programmer or a personal computer to the DL205 CPUs. However, if you need to build a cable(s), use the pinout descriptions shown on the following pages. You can also use the Tech Support/Cable Wiring diagrams located on our website.

  • Page 103: Port 1 Specifications

    Receive Data (RS-232C) Transmit Data (RS-232C Power (+) connection 6-pin Female Power (–) connection (GND) Modular Connector NOTE: The 5V pins are rated at 200mA maximum, primarily for use with some operator interface units. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 104: Port 2 Specifications

    12 RTS2 – Request to Send – (RS–422)(RS–485 DL260) 13 RXD2 + Receive Data + (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260) 14 CTS2 + Clear to Send + (RS422) (RS–485 DL260) 15 CTS2 – Clear to Send – (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260) DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 105: Selecting The Program Storage Media

    This enables you to quickly and easily copy programs between a program developed offline in the Handheld Programmer and the CPU. Also, you can erase EEPROMs, compare them, etc. See the DL205 Handheld Programmer Manual for details on using these AUX functions with the Handheld Programmer.

  • Page 106: Installing The Cpu

    Programmer is shipped with a cable. The cable is approximately 6.5 ft (200cm). Connect Handheld to either Port If you are using a Personal Computer with the DirectSOFT programming package, you can use either the top or bottom port. Connect PC to either Port 3-10 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 107: Cpu Setup Information

    The D2–HPP Handheld Programmer Manual provides the Handheld keystrokes required to perform all of these operations. The DirectSOFT Manual provides a description of the menus and keystrokes required to perform the setup procedures via DirectSOFT. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-11...

  • Page 108: Status Indicators

    TERM (Terminal) program changes are allowed by the programming/monitoring device. CPU is forced into the STOP mode. No changes are allowed by the STOP (DL250–1 and DL260 only Stop Program) programming/monitoring device. 3-12 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 109: Changing Modes In The Dl205 Plc

    Mode of Operation at Power Up The DL205 CPUs will normally power up in the mode that it was in just prior to the power interruption. For example, if the CPU was in Program Mode when the power was disconnected, the CPU will power up in Program Mode (see warning note below).

  • Page 110: Using Battery Backup

    An optional lithium battery is available to maintain the system RAM retentive memory when the DL205 system is without external power. Typical CPU battery life is five years, which includes PLC runtime and normal shut-down periods. However, consider installing a fresh battery if your battery has not been changed recently and the system will be shut down for a period of more than ten days.

  • Page 111: Auxiliary Functions

    Programmer setup, so they will not be needed (or available) with the DirectSOFT package. The following table shows a list of the Auxiliary functions for the different CPUs and the Handheld Programmer. NOTE: The Handheld Programmer may have additional AUX functions that are not supported with the DL205 CPUs. AUX Function and AUX Function and 230 240 250–1 260...

  • Page 112: Clearing An Existing Program

    AUX 31 — Clear V-Memory Initializing System Memory The DL205 CPUs maintain system parameters in a memory area often referred to as the “scratchpad.” In some cases, you may make changes to the system setup that will be stored in system memory.

  • Page 113: Setting The Cpu Network Address

    WARNING: The DL205 CPUs do not come with a battery. The super capacitor will retain the values in the event of a power loss, but only for a short period of time, depending on conditions. If the retentive ranges are important for your application, make sure you obtain the optional battery.

  • Page 114: Using A Password

    CPU. The CPU must be returned to the factory to have the password (along with the ladder project) removed. It is the policy of AutomationDirect to require the memory of the PLC to be cleared along with the password.

  • Page 115: Setting The Analog Potentiometer Ranges

    1.95. Therefore, the smallest increment Resolution = 500 would be 1.95 units. (The actual result depends on exactly how you are using the values in the control program). Resolution = 1.95 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-19...
  • Page 116 Turn all the way counter-clockwise to use lowest value Timing Diagram preset = 100 Current Value 1/10 Seconds Turn clockwise to increase the timer preset. Timing Diagram preset = Current Value 1/10 Seconds 3-20 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 117: Cpu Operation

    CPU Operation Achieving the proper control for your equipment or process requires a good understanding of how DL205 CPUs control all aspects of system operation. The flowchart below shows the main tasks of the CPU operating system. In this section, we...

  • Page 118: Program Mode Operation

    Changes during Run Mode become effective immediately. Make sure you thoroughly consider the impact of any changes to minimize the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment. 3-22 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 119: Read Inputs

    Two basic types of forcing are available with the DL205 CPUs. NOTE: DirectNet protocol does not support bit operations.

  • Page 120: Cpu Bus Communication

    Special V-memory locations hold this information. This portion of the execution cycle makes sure these locations get updated on every scan. Several different Special Relays, such as diagnostic relays, etc., are also updated during this segment. 3-24 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 121: Solve Application Program

    CPU base or the local expansion bases. Remember, the CPU also made sure any forcing operation changes were stored in the output image register, so the forced points get updated with the status specified earlier. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-25...

  • Page 122: Write Outputs To Specialty And Remote I/O

    One of the more important diagnostic tasks is Solve the Application Program the scan time calculation and watchdog timer control. DL205 CPUs have a “watchdog” timer Solve PID Loop Equations that stores the maximum time allowed for the CPU to complete the solve application segment Write Outputs of the scan cycle.

  • Page 123: I/O Response Time

    The following diagram shows an example of the timing for this situation. In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following items: Input Delay +(2 x Scan Time) + Output Delay = Response Time DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-27...

  • Page 124: Improving Response Time

    Therefore, any regular instructions that follow will still use image register values. Any immediate instructions that follow will access the module again to update the status. 3-28 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 125: Cpu Scan Time Considerations

    Report the error, set flag, register, turn on LED Fatal error Force CPU into PGM mode DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-29...

  • Page 126: Initialization Process

    Time = 228.8 µs NOTE: This information provides the amount of time the CPU spends reading the input status from the modules. Don’t confuse this with the I/O response time that was discussed earlier. 3-30 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 127: Reading Inputs From Specialty I/O

    Rec. Min. / Max. 24/58 µs 52/70 µs 25.0/35.0 µs 25.0/35.0 µs Send Min. / Max. 26/30 µs 3.6/11.5 µs 3.6/11.5 µs Port 2 Rec. Min. / Max. 60/75 µs 35.0/44.0 µs 35.0/44.0 µs DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-31...

  • Page 128: Cpu Bus Communication

    (where NO is the total number of output points): Formula Time = 33 + (NO x 14.6 µs) Example Time = 33 + (16 x 14.6 µs) Time = 266.6 µs 3-32 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 129: Writing Outputs To Specialty I/O

    CPU to actually service the particular specialty modules. Diagnostics The DL205 CPUs perform many types of system diagnostics. The amount of time required depends on many things, such as the number of I/O modules installed, etc. The following table shows the minimum and maximum times that can be expected.

  • Page 130: Application Program Execution

    210.5µs TOTAL Appendix C provides a complete list of instruction execution times for DL205 CPUs. Program Control Instructions — the DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs offer additional instructions that can change the way the program executes. These instructions include FOR/ NEXT loops, Subroutines, and Interrupt Routines.

  • Page 131: Plc Numbering Systems

    Our circles are in an array of square containers to the right. To access a resource, our PLC instruction will address its location using the octal references shown. If these were counters, “CT14” would access the black circle location. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-35...

  • Page 132: V-Memory

    FFFF (hex). PLCs often need this full range for sensor data, etc. Hexadecimal is a convenient way for humans to view full binary data. Hexadecimal number 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 V-memory storage 3-36 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 133: Memory Map

    The following paragraphs discuss the various memory types used in the DL205 CPUs. A memory map overview for the DL230, DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs follows the memory descriptions.

  • Page 134: Input Points (X Data Type)

    Input Points (X Data Type) The discrete input points are noted by an X data type. Up to 512 discrete input points are available with the DL205 CPUs. In this example, the output point Y0 will be turned on when input X0 energizes.

  • Page 135: Timer Current Values (V Data Type)

    BCD constant is loaded into the accumulator and then Word Locations – 16 bits stored in a V-memory location. 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-39...

  • Page 136: Stages (S Data Type)

    I/O, but they can be used as normal control relays when remote I/O is not used in the system. In this example, memory location GX0 represents an output point and memory location GX10 represents an input point. GX10 3-40 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 137: Dl230 System V-Memory

    Timer preset block size (high byte) / Counter preset block size (low byte) V7642 1–99 V7643–V7647 Not used Fault Message Error Code — stores the 4-digit code used with the FAULT V7751 instruction when the instruction is executed. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-41...
  • Page 138 Scan — stores the minimum scan time that has occurred since the last V7776 Program Mode to Run Mode transition (milliseconds). Scan — stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last V7777 Program Mode to Run Mode transition (milliseconds). 3-42 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 139: Dl240 System V-Memory

    01 = 2ms 02 = 5ms e.g., a value of 0302 sets 10ms Turnaround Delay (TAD) and 9600 baud. 03 = 10ms 04 = 20ms 05 = 50ms 06 = 100ms 07 = 500ms DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-43...
  • Page 140 If you’ve used ASCII messages (DL240 only), then the data label (DLBL) reference number for that message is stored here. V7752 I/O configuration Error — stores the module ID code for the module that does not match the current configuration. 3-44 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 141 Scan — stores the minimum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition V7776 (milliseconds). Scan — stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition V7777 (milliseconds). DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-45...

  • Page 142: Dl250-1 System V-Memory (Dl250 Also)

    X1 (when D2–CTRINT is installed). Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train V7636 Default: 1006 output, and input filter for X2 (when D2–CTRINT is installed). 3-46 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 143 Module Error — stores the slot number and error code where an I/O error occurs. Scan — stores the total number of scan cycles that have occurred since the last Program Mode to Run V7765 Mode transition. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-47...
  • Page 144 (C750 = master, C751 = slave 1 C757 = slave 7) Communications Ready – The corresponding relay will be ON if the set-up table data is valid. C760 to C767 (C760 = master, C761 = slave 1 C767 = slave 7) 3-48 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 145: Dl260 System V-Memory

    X1 (when D2–CTRINT is installed) Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse V7636 Default: 1006 train output, and input filter for X2 (when D2–CTRINT is installed) DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-49...
  • Page 146 Module Error — stores the slot number and error code where an I/O error occurs. Scan — stores the total number of scan cycles that have occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode V7765 transition. 3-50 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 147 (C750 = master, C751 = slave 1... C757= slave 7 Communications Ready – The corresponding relay will be ON if the set-up table data is valid. C760 to C767 (C760 = master, C761 = slave 1...C767 = slave 7 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-51...

  • Page 148: Dl205 Aliases

    V41200 is the word memory reference for discrete bits SP0 through SP17, therefore, its alias is VSP0. V41201 is the V41200 VSP0 word memory reference for discrete bits SP20 through SP37, therefore, its alias is VSP20. 3-52 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 149: Dl230 Memory Map

    V7750–V7777 NOTE 1: The DL230 systems are limited to 256 discrete I/O points (total) with the present system hardware available. These can be mixed between inputs and output points as necessary. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-53...

  • Page 150: Dl240 Memory Map

    V7746–V7777 NOTE 1: The DL240 systems are limited to 256 discrete I/O points (total) with the present system hardware available. These can be mixed between inputs and output points as necessary. 3-54 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 151: Dl250-1 Memory Map (Dl250 Also)

    None specific, used with many Data Words None 7168 V17777 instructions Stages S0 – S1777 V41000 – V41077 1024 S001 V7400–V7777 V36000– None specific, used for various System parameters None V37777 purposes DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-55...

  • Page 152: Dl260 Memory Map

    V41000 – V41077 1024 S001 GX0 – GX3777 V40000 – V40177 2048 Remote Input and Output Points GY0 – GY3777 V40200–V40377 2048 V7400–V7777 None specific, used for various System parameters None 1.2K purposes V36000–V37777 3-56 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 153: Input/Y Output Bit Map

    Additional DL250-1/DL260 Input (X) and Output (Y) Points V40424 V40524 V40425 V40525 V40426 V40526 556 555 V40427 V40527 576 575 V40430 V40530 V40431 V40531 V40432 V40532 642 641 V40433 V40533 V40434 V40534 V40435 V40535 V40436 V40536 V40437 V40537 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-57...
  • Page 154 1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745 1744 1743 1742 1741 1740 V40476 V40576 V40477 V40577 1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765 1764 1763 1762 1761 1760 3-58 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 155: Control Relay Bit Map

    V40607 V40610 V40611 V40612 V40613 V40614 V40615 V40616 V40617 Additional DL250-1/DL260 Control Relays (C) LSB Address V40620 V40621 V40622 V40623 V40624 V40625 V40626 V40627 V40630 V40631 V40632 V40633 V40634 V40635 V40636 V40637 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-59...
  • Page 156 1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745 1744 1743 1742 1741 1740 V40677 1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765 1764 1763 1762 1761 1760 3-60 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 157 2757 2756 2755 2754 2753 2752 2751 2750 2747 2746 2745 2744 2743 2742 2741 2740 V40737 2777 2776 2775 2774 2773 2772 2771 2770 2767 2766 2765 2764 2763 2762 2761 2760 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-61...
  • Page 158 3757 3756 3755 3754 3753 3752 3751 3750 3747 3746 3745 3744 3743 3742 3741 3740 V40777 3777 3776 3775 3774 3773 3772 3771 3770 3767 3766 3765 3764 3763 3762 3761 3760 3-62 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 159: Stage Control/Status Bit Map

    V41007 V41010 V41011 V41012 V41013 V41014 V41015 V41016 V41017 Additional DL240/DL250-1/DL260 Stage (S) Control Bits Address V41020 V41021 V41022 V41023 V41024 V41025 V41026 V41027 V41030 V41031 V41032 V41033 V41034 V41035 V41036 V41037 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-63...
  • Page 160 1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745 1744 1743 1742 1741 1740 V41077 1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765 1764 1763 1762 1761 1760 3-64 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 161: Timer And Counter Status Bit Maps

    V41115 V41116 V41117 This portion of the table shows additional Counter contacts available with the DL260. Additional DL260 Counter (CT) Contacts LSB Counter Address V41150 V41151 V41152 V41153 V41154 V41155 V41156 V41157 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-65...

  • Page 162: Remote I/O Bit Map

    756 755 754 753 752 751 750 747 746 745 744 743 742 741 740 V40037 V40237 776 775 774 773 772 771 770 767 766 765 764 763 762 761 760 3-66 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 163 1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745 1744 1743 1742 1741 1740 V40077 V40277 1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765 1764 1763 1762 1761 1760 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-67...
  • Page 164 2757 2756 2755 2754 2753 2752 2751 2750 2747 2736 2735 2734 2733 2732 2731 2730 V40137 V40337 2777 2776 2775 2774 2773 2772 2771 2770 2767 2766 2765 2764 2763 2762 2761 2760 3-68 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 165 3757 3756 3755 3754 3753 3752 3751 3750 3747 3746 3745 3744 3743 3742 3741 3740 V40177 V40377 3777 3776 3775 3774 3773 3772 3771 3770 3767 3766 3765 3764 3763 3762 3761 3760 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-69...
  • Page 166 Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations Notes 3-70 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 167 In This Chapter: DL205 System Design Strategies ..........4–2 Module Placement ..............4–3 Calculating the Power Budget ............ 4–7 Local Expansion I/O ..............4–11 Expanding DL205 I/O ..............4–17 Network Connections to Modbus and DirectNet ....... 4–32 Network Slave Operation ............

  • Page 168: Chapter 4: System Design And Configuration

    Remote Master module, or may connect directly to the bottom port on a DL250–1 or DL260 CPU. A DL205 system can be developed using many different arrangements of these configurations. All I/O configurations use the standard complement of DL205 I/O modules and bases. Local expansion requires using (–1) bases. Networking Configurations The DL205 PLCs offers the following way to add networking to the system: •...

  • Page 169: Module Placement

    CPU or a base controller (EBC) or Remote Slave and is not numbered. Module Placement Restrictions The following table lists the valid locations for all types of modules in a DL205 system. Module/Unit Local CPU Base Local Expansion Base...

  • Page 170: Automatic I/O Configuration

    Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration Automatic I/O Configuration The DL205 CPUs automatically detect any installed I/O modules (including specialty modules) at powerup, and establish the correct I/O configuration and addresses. This applies to modules located in local and local expansion I/O bases. For most applications, you will never have to change the configuration.

  • Page 171: Removing A Manual Configuration

    Power–On I/O Configuration Check The DL205 CPUs can also be set to automatically check the I/O configuration on power-up. By selecting this feature, you can detect any changes that may have occurred while the power was disconnected.

  • Page 172: I/O Points Required For Each Module

    NOTE: 12pt. modules consume 16 points. The first 6 points are assigned, two are skipped, and then the next 6 points are assigned. For example, a D2–12TA installed in slot 0 would use Y0–Y5, and Y-10-Y15. Y6–Y7 and Y16–Y17 would be unused. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 173: Calculating The Power Budget

    Calculating the Power Budget Managing Your Power Resource When you determine the types and quantities of I/O modules you will be using in the DL205 system, it is important to remember there is a limited amount of power available from the power supply.
  • Page 174 5mA @ 10-30V F2–8AD4DA-2 F2–08AD–2 5mA @ 10-30V F2–04RTD F2–02DA–1 60** F2–04THM F2–02DA–1L 70mA @ 12V** F2–02DA–2 F2–02DA–2L 70mA @ 12V** F2–08DA–1 50mA** F2–08DA–2 *requires external 5VDC for outputs **add an additional 20mA per loop DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 175: Power Budget Calculation Example

    Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration Power Budget Calculation Example The following example shows how to calculate the power budget for the DL205 system. Auxiliary Base # Module Type 5 VDC (mA) Power Source 24 VDC Output (mA) Available Base Power D2–09B–1...

  • Page 176: Power Budget Calculation Worksheet

    WARNING: It is extremely important to calculate the power budget. If you exceed the power budget, the system may operate in an unpredictable manner which may result in a risk of personal injury or equipment damage. 4-10 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 177: Local Expansion I/O

    D2–CM has established communication with PLC RUN (Green) D2–CM has not established communication with PLC Hardware watch–dog failure DIAG (Red) ON/OFF I/O module failure (ON 500ms / OFF 500ms) No D2–CM error DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-11...

  • Page 178: D2-Em Local Expansion Module

    NOTE: Commercially available Patch (Straight–through) Category 5, UTP cables will work in place of the D2–EXCBL–1. The D2–EM modules only use the wires connected to pins 3 and 6 as shown above. 4-12 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 179: Dl260 Local Expansion System

    • Use the D2–EXCBL–1 or equivalent cable to connect the D2–EMs together. Either of the RJ45 ports (labeled A and B) on the D2–EM can be used to connect one base to another. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-13...

  • Page 180: Dl250-1 Local Expansion System

    • Use the D2–EXCBL–1 or equivalent cable to connect the D2–EMs together. Either of the RJ45 ports (labelled A and B) on the D2–EM can be used to connect one base to another. 4-14 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 181: Expansion Base Output Hold Option

    WARNING: Selecting “HOLD LAST STATE” means that outputs on the expansion bases will not be under program control in the event of a communications failure. Consider the consequences to process operation carefully before selecting this mode. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-15...

  • Page 182: Enabling I/O Configuration Check Using Directsoft

    To display the I/O Config Check window, use DirectSOFT>PLC menu>Setup>I/O Config Check. Select “Yes,” then save to disk or to PLC, if connected to the PLC. 4-16 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 183: Expanding Dl205 I/O

    100 meters (328 ft) 2000 meters (6560 ft) Ethernet Port RJ45 ST-style fiber optic TCP/IP, IPX, Modbus Ethernet Protocols TCP/IP, IPX TCP/IP, DHCP, TCP/IP, IPX HTML configuration Power Consumption 320mA @ 5VDC 450mA @ 5VDC DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-17...

  • Page 184: Ethernet Remote Master Hardware Configuration

    Once the ERM remote I/O network is configured and running, the PC can be removed from the network. DirectLogic PLC Dedicated Hub(s) Module for ERM Network DirectLogic DL205 I/O with EBC Module GS–EDRV DirectLogic DL405 I/O or HA–EDRV2 with EBC Module Terminator I/O Drive with EBC Module 4-18 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 185: Installing The Erm Module

    ERM Workbench. ERM Module ID Set the ERM Module ID before installing the module in the DL205 base. Always set the module ID to 0. A Module ID can be set in one of two ways: • Use the DIP switches on the module (1-63) •...
  • Page 186 Do not install the ERM in Slot 0. NOTE: The module will not work in slot 0 of the DL205 series PLCs, the slot next to the CPU. Network Cabling Of the three types of ERM modules available, one supports the 10BaseT standard, another supports 10/100BaseT and the other one supports the 10BaseFL standard.
  • Page 187 Refer to the ERM manual for using the fiber optic cable with the H2-ERM-F. An explanation of the use of the ERM Workbench software is too lengthy for this manual. The full use of the workbench and NetEdit utilities is discussed in the ERM manual. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-21...
  • Page 188 The Ethernet Base Controller (EBC) serves as an interface between the master control system and the DL205/405 I/O modules. The control function is performed by the master controller, not the EBC slave. The EBC occupies the CPU slot in the base and communicates across the backplane to input and output modules.
  • Page 189 Setting the Module ID with the DIP switches is identical to setting the DIP switches on the H2-ERM(100) module. Refer to page 4-19 in this chapter. Insert the EBC Module Once the Module ID DIP switches are set, insert the module in the CPU slot of any DL205 base. Insert H2-EBC in CPU slot DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev.
  • Page 190 3 4 5 6 8-pin RJ45 Connector GRN/WHT OR/WHT (8P8C) TD+ 1 1 TD+ TD– 2 2 TD– OR/WHT GRN/WHT RD+ 3 3 RD+ BLU/WHT BLU/WHT RD– 6 6 RD– BRN/WHT BRN/WHT RJ45 RJ45 4-24 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 191: 10Basefl Network Cabling

    (also supports 10Base–FL Networks) 100 meters 100 meters (328 feet) (328 feet) 10Base–T Hub (required if using more than one Ethernet slave) 100 meters 100 meters (328 feet) 100 meters (328 feet) (328 feet) DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-25...

  • Page 192: Add A Serial Remote I/O Master/Slave Module

    Remote I/O points map into different CPU memory locations, therefore it does not reduce the number of local I/O points. Refer to the DL205 Remote I/O manual for details on remote I/O configuration and numbering. Configuring the built-in remote I/O channel is described in the following section.

  • Page 193: Configuring The Cpu's Remote I/O Channel

    Then click the button indicated to send the Port 2 configuration to the CPU, and click Close. NOTE: You must configure the baud rate on the Remote Slaves with DIP switches to match the baud rate selection for the CPU’s Port 2. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-27...
  • Page 194 The resistance values should be between 100 and 500 ohms. NOTE: To match termination resistance to AutomationDirect L19827 (Belden 9841), use a 120 ohm resistor across terminals 1 and 2. NOTE: See the transient suppression for inductive loads information in Chapter 2 of this manual for further information on wiring practices.

  • Page 195: Configuring The Remote I/O Table

    Use the regular LD constant to load the number of the slave’s input or output V37704 points. The following page gives a short program example for one slave. V37705 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-29...

  • Page 196: Remote I/O Setup Program

    Remember to use the LDA or LD instructions appropriately. V37706 The next page covers the remainder of the required program to get this remote I/O link up and running. V37707 4-30 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 197: Remote I/O Test Program

    After placing the PLC in RUN mode, we can go to the remote base and activate its first input. Then its first output should turn on. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-31...

  • Page 198: Network Connections To Modbus And Directnet

    This section describes how to configure the CPU’s built-in networking ports for either Modbus or DirectNET. This will allow you to connect the DL205 PLC system directly to Modbus networks using the RTU protocol, or to other devices on a DirectNET network. For more 250-1 details on DirectNET, order our DirectNET manual, part number DA–DNET–M.

  • Page 199: Modbus Port Configuration

    • Echo Suppression: Select the appropriate radio button based on the wiring configuration used on port 2. Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU, and click Close. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-33...

  • Page 200: Directnet Port Configuration

    • Parity: Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking. • Format: Choose hex or ASCII formats. Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU, and click Close. 4-34 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 201: Network Slave Operation

    Modbus address to specify a PLC memory location the DL250–1 or DL260 comprehends. The DirectNET host uses normal I/O addresses to access applicable DL205 CPU and system. No CPU ladder logic is required to support either Modbus slave or DirectNET slave operation.
  • Page 202 V-Memory, user data (V) 14.6K V1400 – V7377 1024 – 2047 Holding Register V10000 – V35777 V7400 – V7777 3480 – 4095 V-Memory, system (V) Holding Register 1024 V36000 – V37777 15360 – 16383 4-36 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 203 3. Add the starting address for the range (3073). 4. Use the Modbus data type from the table. Outputs (Y) Y0 – Y477 2048 - 2367 Coil Control Relays (C) C0 – C377 3073 – 3551 Coil DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-37...

  • Page 204: If Your Modbus Host Software Requires An Address Only

    6145 – 6400 6145 – 6400 Output Counter Contacts (CT) CT0 – CT377 6401 – 6656 6401 – 6656 Output Stage Status Bits (S) S0 – S1777 5121 – 6144 5121 – 6144 Output 4-38 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 205 Refer to your PLC user manual for the correct memory size of your PLC. Some of the addresses shown above might not pertain to your particular CPU. For an automated Modbus/Koyo address conversion utility, search and download the file modbus_conversion.xls from the www.automationdirect.com website. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-39...

  • Page 206: Example 1: V2100 584/984 Mode

    Addressing the memory types for DirectNET slaves is very easy. Use the ordinary native address of the slave device itself. To access a slave PLC’s memory address V2000 via 250-1 DirectNET, for example, the network master will request V2000 from the slave. 4-40 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 207: Network Master Operation

    The following step-by-step procedure will provide the information necessary to set up your ladder program to receive data from a network slave. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-41...
  • Page 208 The number of bytes specified also depends on the type of data you want to obtain. For example, the DL205 Input points can be accessed by V-memory locations or as X input locations. However, if you only want X0 – X27, you’ll have to use the X input data type because the V-memory locations can only be accessed in 2-byte increments.
  • Page 209 WX and RX instruction as the slave’s native I/O address. O40600 • Modbus DL405 or DL205 slaves – specify the same address in the WX and RX instruction as the slave’s native I/O address. • Modbus 305 slaves – use the following table to convert DL305 addresses to Modbus addresses.

  • Page 210: Communications From A Ladder Program

    SP1 16 C100 ensure proper execution and switch from stage to stage allowing only one of them to be active at a time. KF201 O40400 C100 4-44 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 211: Network Modbus Rtu Master Operation (Dl260 Only)

    Y, C, T, CT 03, 04 Read a value from one or more registers Write a value into a single register (slave only) Read Exception Status Diagnostics Write a value into a group of registers DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-45...

  • Page 212: Modbus Port Configuration

    • Echo Suppression: Select the appropriate radio button based on the wiring configuration used on port 2. Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU, and click Close. 4-46 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 213: Network (Modbus Only)

    RTS2 – Request to Send – (RS–422/RS–485) CPU Port 2 ASCII Device RXD2 + Receive Data + (RS–422/RS–485) CTS2 + Clear to Send + (RS422/RS–485) CTS2 – Clear to Send – (RS–422/RS–485) DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-47...

  • Page 214: Modbus Read From Network (Mrx)

    • Modbus Data Format: specifies Modbus 584/984 or 484 data format to be used. • Exception Response Buffer: specifies the master memory address where the Exception Response will be placed. See the table on the following page. 4-48 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 215: Mrx Slave Memory Address

    Operand Data Type DL260 Range V–memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ All (see page 3-56) Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Bits:1–2000 Registers: 1-125 MRX Exception Response Buffer Exception Response Buffer Operand Data Type DL260 Range V–memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ All (see page 3-56) DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-49...

  • Page 216: Modbus Write To Network (Mwx)

    15 or 16 is selected. • Modbus Data Format: specifies Modbus 584/984 or 484 data format to be used. • Exception Response Buffer: specifies the master memory address where the Exception Response will be placed. 4-50 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 217: Mwx Slave Memory Address

    DL260 Range V–memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ All (see page 3-56) Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Bits: 1–2000 Registers: 1-125 MWX Exception Response Buffer Exception Response Buffer Operand Data Type DL260 Range V–memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ All (see page 3-56) DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-51...

  • Page 218: Mrx/Mwx Example In Directsoft

    Each application will dictate what allowable "percentage" of error is acceptable. Anything below 10% typically does not affect the throughput very much. Port 2 error bit SP117 Number of times that the PLC has errored _FirstScan K9999 4-52 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 219 01 - Read Coil Status Start Slave Memory Address: Start Master Memory Address: Number of Elements: Modbus Data Type: 584/984 Mode Exception Response Buffer: V400 Instruction interlock bit C100 ( RST ) DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-53...

  • Page 220: Non-Sequence Protocol (Ascii In/Out And Print)

    • Parity: Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking. Be sure to match the parity specified for the connected devices. • Memory Address: Starting V-memory address for ASCII In data storage. 4-54 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 221: Rs-485 Network

    RTS2 – Request to Send – (RS–422/RS–485) RXD2 + Receive Data + (RS–422/RS–485) CTS2 + Clear to Send + (RS-422/RS–485) CTS2 – Clear to Send – (RS–422/RS–485) CPU Port 2 ASCII Device DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-55...

  • Page 222: Configure The Dl250-1 Port 2 For Non-Sequence

    • Parity: Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking. Be sure to match the parity specified for the connected device. Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU, and click Close. 4-56 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 223: Rs-422 Network

    RS–422 signals are for long distances (1000 meters max.). Use termination resistors at both ends of RS–422 network wiring, matching the impedance rating of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms). NOTE: For RS–422 cabling, we recommend AutomationDirect L19853 (Belden 8103) or equivalent. RXD+ RXD–...
  • Page 224 Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration Notes 4-58 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 225 hapter hapter hapter nteLLIgent nstRuctIons In This Chapter: Introduction ................5–2 Using Boolean Instructions ............5–5 Boolean Instructions ..............5–10 Comparative Boolean ..............5–27 Immediate Instructions ...............5–33 Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions ......5–41 Accumulator/Stack Load and Output Data Instructions ....5–53 Logical Instructions (Accumulator) ..........5–71 Math Instructions ...............5–88 Transcendental Functions (DL260 only) ........5–121 Bit Operation Instructions ............5–123...

  • Page 226: Introduction

    Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions Introduction The DL205 CPUs offer a wide variety of instructions to perform many different types of operations. Several instructions are not available in all of the CPUs. This chapter shows you how to use these individual instructions. There are two ways to quickly find the instruction you need: •...
  • Page 227 5–25 MULR Multiply Real 5–96 RSTBIT Reset Bit 5–148 MULS Multiply Top of Stack 5–115 RSTI Reset Immediate 5–38 NCON Numeric Constand 5–199 RSTWT Reset Watch Dog Timer 5–178 NEXT Next (For/Next) 5–180 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 228 Store if Not Equal 5–27 XORF Exclusive Or Formatted 5–81 STRNI Store Not Immediate 5–33 XORMOV Exclusive Or Move 5–171 STRPD Store Positive Differential 5–21 XORS Exclusive Or Stack 5–82 Source to Table 5–160 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 229: Using Boolean Instructions

    The following paragraphs show how these instructions are used to build simple ladder programs. END Statement All DL205 programs require an END statement as the last instruction. This tells the CPU that this is the end of the program. Normally, any instructions placed after the END statement will not be executed.

  • Page 230: Normally Closed Contact

    The following example shows how you can use the AND instruction to continue a rung with more conditional outputs. DirectSOFT Example Handheld Mnemonics STR X0 AND X1 OUT Y0 AND X2 OUT Y1 AND X3 OUT Y2 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 231: Joining Series Branches In Parallel

    STR X1 OR X2 ANDSTR OUT Y0 Combination Networks You can combine the various types of series and parallel branches to solve most any application problem. The following example shows a simple combination network. DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 232 There are limits to how many elements you can include in a rung. This is because the DL205 CPUs use an 8-level boolean stack to evaluate the various logic elements. The boolean stack is a temporary storage area that solves the logic for the rung.
  • Page 233 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions Immediate Boolean The DL205 Micro PLCs can usually complete an operation cycle in a matter of milliseconds. However, in some applications you may not be able to wait a few milliseconds until the next I/O update occurs. The DL205 PLCs offer immediate input and outputs which are special boolean instructions that allow reading directly from inputs and writing directly to outputs during the program execution portion of the CPU cycle.

  • Page 234: Boolean Instructions

    Used HPP Used DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes In the following Store Not example, when input X1 is off output Y2 will energize. DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STRN 5-10 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 235 B1400.12 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT In the following Store Not Bit-of-Word example, when bit 12 of V-memory location V1400 is off, output Y2 will energize. DirectSOFT B1400.12 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes STRN SHFT 5-11 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 236 In the following Or example, when input X1 or X2 is on, output Y5 will energize. Implied DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Used In the following Or Not example, when input X1 is on or X2 is off, output Y5 will energize. DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes 5-12 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 237 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT In the following Or Not Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 is on or bit 7 of V1400 is off, output Y7 will energize. DirectSOFT B1400.7 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT 5-13 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 238 In the following And example, when input X1 and X2 are on output Y5 will energize. Implied DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Used In the following And Not example, when input X1 is on and X2 is off output Y5 will energize. DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes ANDN 5-14 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 239 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT In the following And Not Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 is on and bit 4 of V1400 is off, output Y5 will energize. DirectSOFT B1400.4 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes ANDN SHFT 5-15 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 240 250-1 In the following Or Store example, the branch consisting of X1 and X2 have been OR’d with the branch consisting of X3 and X4. Implied Used DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes ORST 5-16 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 241 Y10. X1 will override the Y10 output being controlled by X0. To avoid this situation, multiple outputs using the same location should not be used in programming. If you need to have an output controlled by multiple inputs, see the OROUT instruction on page 5–19. 5-17 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 242 X1 will override the logic state controlled by X0. To avoid this situation, multiple outputs using the same location must not be used in programming. location must not be used in programming. B1400.3 B1400.3 5-18 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 243 In the following example, when X1 is off, Y2 will energize. This is because the Not instruction inverts the status of the rung at the Not instruction. Used DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Used SHFT INST# 5-19 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 244 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT NOTE: To generate a “one–shot” pulse on an on–to–off transition, place a NOT instruction immediately before the PD instruction. The DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs support the STRND instruction. 5-20 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 245 In the following example, each time X1 is makes an off-to-on transition, Y4 will energize for one scan. Used Used Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DirectSOFT SHFT In the following example, each time X1 makes an on-to-off transition, Y4 will energize for one scan. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DirectSOFT SHFT 5-21 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 246 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DirectSOFT SHFT In the following example, Y5 will energize whenever X1 is on, or for one CPU scan when X2 transitions from on to off. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DirectSOFT SHFT 5-22 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 247 DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT In the following example, Y5 will energize for one CPU scan whenever X1 is on and X2 transitions from on to off. DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT 5-23 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 248 In the following example, when X1 is on, Y2 through Y5 will energize. Used Used DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes In the following example, when X2 is on, Y2 through Y5 will be reset or de–energized. DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes 5-24 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 249 Used DirectSOFT Used B1400.1 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT In the following example, when X2 turns on, bit 1 in V1400 is reset to the off state. DirectSOFT B1400.1 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT 5-25 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 250 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes INST# In some cases, you may want certain output points in the specified pause range to operate normally. In that case, use Aux 58 to override the Pause instruction. 5-26 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 251: Comparative Boolean

    Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DirectSOFT V2000 K4933 SHFT In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 / = 5060, Y3 will energize. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DirectSOFT SHFT V2000 K5060 STRN 5-27 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 252 SHFT In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 3916 or V2002 / = 2500, Y3 will energize. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DirectSOFT SHFT V2000 K3916 V2002 K2500 SHFT 5-28 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 253 In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 5000 and V2002 / = DS Implied 2345, Y3 will energize. HPP Used DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes V2000 K5000 V2002 K2345 SHFT SHFT DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes V2000 K5000 V2002 K2345 SHFT SHFT ANDN 5-29 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 254 HPP Used DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes V2000 K1000 SHFT In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 < 4050, Y3 will energize. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DirectSOFT V2000 K4050 SHFT STRN 5-30 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 255 K2345 SHFT In the following example when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 1000 or V2002 < 2500, Y3 will energize. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DirectSOFT SHFT V2000 K1000 SHFT V2002 K2500 5-31 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 256 SHFT In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 7000 and V2002 < 2500, Y3 will energize. DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT V2000 K7000 V2002 K2500 SHFT ANDN 5-32 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 257: Immediate Instructions

    In the following example, when X1 is on, Y2 will energize. DS Implied HPP Used DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT In the following example, when X1 is off, Y2 will energize. DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT STRN 5-33 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 258 In the following example, when X1 or X2 is on, Y5 will energize. DS Implied HPP Used DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT In the following example, when X1 is on or X2 is off, Y5 will energize. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DirectSOFT SHFT 5-34 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 259 In the following example, when X1 and X2 are on, Y5 will energize. DS Implied HPP Used DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT In the following example, when X1 is on and X2 is off, Y5 will energize. DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDN 5-35 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 260 Used HPP Used DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes OUTI INST# In the following example, when X1 or X4 is on, Y2 will energize. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DirectSOFT OR OUTI INST# OR OUTI INST# 5-36 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 261 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 Acc. OUTIF Copy the value in the lower Constant Location 8 bits of the accumulator to Y30-Y37 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT SHFT ANDST SHFT 5-37 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 262 SHFT In the following example, when X1 is on, Y5 through Y22 will be reset (off) in the image register and on the corresponding output module(s). DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes RSTI SHFT 5-38 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 263 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 Acc. OUTI V40502 Output the value in the accumulator to output points Y40 to Y57 Location V40502 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT ANDST SHFT NEXT 5-39 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 264 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 Acc. OUTIF Location Constant Copy the value of the lower 8 bits of the accumulator to Y30 - - Y37 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT ANDST SHFT 5-40 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 265: Timer, Counter And Shift Register Instructions

    9999999.9 and 999999.99 seconds respectively. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the timer input, timer reset, associated discrete bit, current value, and timer preset. Seconds TMRA Enable Reset Input Current Value 1/10 Seconds 5-41 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 266 You can perform functions when the timer reaches the specified preset using the discrete status bit. Or, use the comparative contacts to perform functions at different time intervals based on one timer. The examples on the following page show these methods of programming timers. 5-42 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 267 0 and the comparative contacts will turn off Y3, Y4, and Timing Diagram DirectSOFT Seconds TA20 TA20 TA20 Current Value 1/10th Seconds Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-43 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 268: Accumulating Timer (Tmra)

    NOTE: * Both the Timer discrete status bits and the current value are accessed with the same data reference with the HPP. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “T2” for discrete status bit for Timer T2, and “TA2” for the current value of Timer T2. 5-44 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 269: Accumulating Timer Example Using Discrete Status Bits

    TA21 TA20 TA21 Current TA21 Value 1/10th Seconds TA20 TA21 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont’d) SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-45 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 270 NOTE: * Both the Counter discrete status bits and the current value are accessed with the same data reference with the HPP. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “CT2” for discrete status bit for Counter CT2, and “CTA2” for the current value of Counter CT2. 5-46 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 271 C10 turns on, the counter status bit will turn off and the counter current value will be 0, and the comparative contacts will turn off. Counting diagram DirectSOFT CTA2 CTA2 Current Value CTA2 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont) SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-47 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 272 NOTE: * Both the Counter discrete status bits and the current value are accessed with the same data reference with the HPP. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “CT2” for discrete status bit for Counter CT2, and “CTA2” for the current value of Counter CT2. 5-48 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 273: Stage Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits

    CT2 will be held in V-memory location V1002. Counting diagram DirectSOFT SGCNT CTA2 CTA2 Current CTA2 Value Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont) SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-49 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 274 NOTE: * Both the Counter discrete status bits and the current value are accessed with the same data reference with the HPP. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “CT2” for discrete status bit for Counter CT2, and “CTA2” for the current value of Counter CT2. 5-50 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 275: Up/Down Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits

    (X3) turns on, the counter status bit will turn off, the current value will be 0, and the comparative contacts will turn off. Counting Diagram DirectSOFT V2000 CTA2 CTA2 Current Value Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont) SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-51 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 276 0-377 0-377 0-1777 0-1777 0-3777 0-3777 DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Data Input From Clock Input SHFT SHFT SHFT Reset Input Inputs on Successive Scans Shift Register Bits Data Clock Reset Indicates Indicates 5-52 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 277 Accumulator/Stack Load and Output Data Instructions Using the Accumulator The accumulator in the DL205 series CPUs is a 32-bit register that is used as a temporary storage location for data that is being copied or manipulated in some manner. For example, you have to use the accumulator to perform math operations, such as, add, subtract, multiply, etc.
  • Page 278 POP is executed, the value that was in the accumulator is cleared and the value that was on top of the stack is in the accumulator. The values in the stack are shifted up one position in the stack. 5-54 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 279 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 V2002 Level 6 V2002 Level 7 Cop data rom the accum ulator to Level 8 V2002 5-55 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 280 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Acc. Rotate the data in the accumulator 2 bits to the right OUTD V1410 Output the value in the accumulator to V1410 and V1411 V1411 V1410 5-56 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 281 NOTE: In the DL205, V-memory addressing is in octal. However the value in the pointer location which will reference a V-memory location is viewed as HEX. Use the Load Address instruction to move an address into the pointer location.
  • Page 282 16 bits of the accumulator Acc. V2010 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 V2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT 5-58 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 283 Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the 32 bit accumulator Acc. OUTD V2011 V2010 V2010 Copy the value in the 32 bit accumulator to V2010 and V2011 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT 5-59 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 284 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 OUTF Location Constant Y6 Y5 Y2 Y1 Copy the value from the specified number of bits in the accumulator to Y0 – Y6 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT 5-60 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 285 HEX value into the accumulator. This O aaa 250-1 instruction is useful when an address parameter is required since all addresses for the DL205 system are in octal. Operand Data DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range...
  • Page 286 Level 4 Acc. V1500 Level 5 The value in V1435 Level 6 Copy the value in the lower is 2345 16 bits of the accumulator Level 7 to V1500 Level 8 V1500 5-62 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 287 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator The unused accumulator to V2000 bits are set to zero Acc. DLBL NCON Offset 0 V2000 K3333 NCON Offset 1 K2323 NCON Offset 2 K4549 5-63 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 288 Just use the Load Real with the V data type, as V1400 shown to the right. Next we could perform real math on it, or convert it to a binary number. 5-64 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 289 16 bits of the bits are set to zero accumulator Acc. V2010 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 V2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT 5-65 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 290 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes V2000 SHFT ANDST Load the value in V2000 and V2001 into the accumulator Acc. OUTD SHFT V2010 Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and V2011 V2010 V2011 5-66 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 291 Accumulator Copy the value of the specified number of bits from the accumulator to Location Constant Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 Y20–Y26 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT 5-67 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 292 V1500 to yield offset address V1525 Level 3 the final destination. (V1500+25). Level 4 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 PREV SHFT ANDST Level 8 SHFT ANDST SHFT 5-68 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 293 Copy the value in the upper OUTM bits are set to zero 8 bits of the lower 16 bits of V1500 the accumulator to V1500 Acc. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes V1500 SHFT ANDST SHFT ORST 5-69 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 294 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2002 Level 4 Level 5 V2002 Level 6 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Level 7 SHFT Level 8 SHFT SHFT INST# SHFT SHFT SHFT INST# SHFT SHFT SHFT INST# SHFT 5-70 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 295: Logical Instructions (Accumulator)

    0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Acc. V2010 Copy the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 V2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT 5-71 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 296 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 36476A38 Acc. OUTD V2010 Copy the value in the V2011 V2010 accumulator to V2010 and V2011 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-72 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 297 AND (Y20-Y23) OUTF Acc. Copy the value in the lower 4 bits in accumulator to C20-C23 Location Constant Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT ANDST SHFT NEXT SHFT PREV PREV 5-73 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 298 (top of stack) accumulator with the first level of the Acc. accumulator stack OUTD V1500 Copy the value in the accumulator to V1500 V1501 V1500 and 1501 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT 5-74 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 299 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 Acc. V2010 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 V2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT 5-75 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 300 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 Acc. OUTD V2010 Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and V2011 V2010 V2011 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-76 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 301 Copy the specified number of bits from the accumulator to C20-C23 Location Constant C23 C22 C21 C20 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes ON ON ON SHFT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT ANDST SHFT NEXT SHFT PREV PREV 5-77 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 302 OR (top of stack) in the first level of the accumulator stack Acc. OUTD V1500 Copy the value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 V1500 V1501 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT 5-78 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 303 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 Acc. V2010 Copy the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 V2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-79 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 304 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 Acc. V2010 Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and V2011 V2011 V2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-80 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 305 XORF (Y20-Y23) OUTF Acc. Copy the specified number of bits from the accumulator to C20-C23 Location Constant Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT ANDST SHFT SHFT NEXT SHFT PREV PREV 5-81 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 306 Acc. accumulator stack OUTD V1500 Copy the value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 V1501 V1500 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-82 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 307 Acc. Compared with V2000 Compare the value in the V2000 accumulator with the value in V2000 SP60 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT ORST SHFT STRN SHFT 5-83 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 308 Acc. Compared with CMPD V2010 Compare the value in the V2011 V2010 accumulator with the value in V2010 and V2011 SP60 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT ORST SHFT STRN SHFT 5-84 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 309 (C10- - C13) into the accumulator The unused accumulator bits are set to zero Compare the value in the CMPF accumulator with the value of the specified discrete Acc. location (Y20- - Y23) Compared SP60 with 5-85 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 310 SP60 Acc. 5 Compared with Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Top of Stack SHFT ANDST SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT ORST SHFT STRN SHFT 5-86 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 311 (special relay SP62). DirectSOFT Load the real number representation for decimal 7 R7.0 into the accumulator Acc. Compare the value with the CMPR real number representation R6.0 for decimal 6 CMPR SP62 5-87 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 312: Math Instructions

    16 bits of the accumulator with the value in V2006 V2010 Copy the value in the lower V2010 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT 5-88 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 313 Add the value in the accumulator with the value in V2006 and V2007 OUTD V2010 V2011 V2010 Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and V2011 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-89 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 314 You must use DirectSOFT for this feature. NOTE : If the value being added to a real number is 16,777,216 times smaller than the real number, the calculation will not work. 5-90 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 315 16 bits of the accumulator V2010 V2010 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-91 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 316 The value in V2006 and V2007 is subtracted from the value in the accumulator OUTD V2010 V2011 V2010 Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and V2011 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-92 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 317 129 - - 127 = 2 Implies 2 (exp 2) NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature. 5-93 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 318 The value in V2006 is multiplied by the value in the accumulator OUTD V2011 V2010 V2010 Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and V2011 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT ORST ANDST SHFT 5-94 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 319 Move the result in the OUTD accumulator to V1402 V1402 and V1403 using the OUTD instruction. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT PREV SHFT SHFT SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT SHFT PREV ANDST SHFT ORST ANDST SHFT 5-95 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 320 133 - - 127 = 6 Implies 2 (exp 6) NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature. 5-96 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 321 V2006 V2010 V2010 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT 5-97 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 322 V1420 and V1421 OUTD V1500 Copy the value in the V1501 V1500 accumulator to V1500 and V1501 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT 5-98 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 323 127 - - 127 = 0 Implies 2 (exp 0) NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature. 5-99 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 324 Decrement the value in V1400 by “1”. V1400 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT SHFT NOTE: Use a pulsed contact closure to INC/DEC the value in V–memory once per closure. 5-100 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 325 V1420 OUTD V1500 V1500 Copy the value in the lower 16bits of the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 Handheld Programmer Keyst rokes E NT SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-101 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 326 V1420 and V1421 OUTD V1501 V1500 V1500 Copy the value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-102 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 327 (Accumulator) 619 (Hex) = 1561 (decimal) Acc. V1500 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V1500 V1500 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-103 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 328 The binary value in V1420 and V1421 is subtracted from the binary value in the accumulator OUTD V1500 V1501 V1500 Copy the value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-104 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 329 OUTD V1500 (V1500 - V1501 value = 117806 decimal) Copy the value of the accumulator V1501 V1500 to V1500 and V1501 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-105 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 330 Top of stack holds remainder the binary value in V1420 V1501 V1500 V1500 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V1500 SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-106 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 331 In the following example, when C5 is on, the binary value in V2000 is increased by 1. DirectSOFT V2000 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes INCB SHFT V2000 SHFT Increment the binary value in V2000 by “1” V2000 5-107 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 332 In the following example, when C5 is on, the value in V2000 is decreased by 1. V2000 DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes DECB SHFT SHFT V2000 SHFT Decrement the binary value V2000 in V2000 by “1” 5-108 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 333 (C0-C3) represented by discrete location C0–C3 Acc. Copy the lower 4 bits of the OUTF accumulator to discrete locations Y10–Y13 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT SHFT 5-109 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 334 ACC. Copy the lower 4 bits of the OUTF accumulator to discrete locations Y10- - Y13 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT SHFT 5-110 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 335 C0- - C3 Acc. Copy the lower 4 bits of the OUTF accumulator to discrete locations Y10- - Y13 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT ORST ANDST SHFT 5-111 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 336 First stack location contains Copy the lower 4 bits of the OUTF the remainder accumulator to discrete locations Y10- - Y13 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT SHFT 5-112 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 337 OUTD accumulator to V1500 Level 2 V1500 and V1501 Level 3 Level 4 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes V1501 V1500 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 SHFT ANDST Level 8 SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT 5-113 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 338 V1500 V1500 and V1501 Level 2 Level 3 V1501 V1500 Level 4 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 SHFT Level 8 ANDST SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-114 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 339 OUTD Level 3 accumulator to V1500 V1500 and V1501 Level 4 V1501 V1500 Level 5 Level 6 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Level 7 Level 8 SHFT ANDST SHFT ANDST SHFT ORST ANDST SHFT 5-115 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 340 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes The remainder resides in the first stack location Level 1 SHFT ANDST Level 2 Level 3 SHFT ANDST Level 4 SHFT Level 5 Level 6 SHFT Level 7 Level 8 5-116 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 341 Copy the value in the OUTD accumulator to V1500 Level 2 V1500 and V1501 Level 3 Level 4 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 SHFT Level 8 ANDST SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT 5-117 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 342 V1500 Level 2 V1500 and V1501 Level 3 V1501 V1500 Level 4 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 SHFT Level 8 ANDST SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-118 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 343 OUTD Level 3 accumulator to V1500 V1500 and V1501 Level 4 V1501 V1500 Level 5 Level 6 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Level 7 Level 8 SHFT ANDST SHFT ANDST SHFT ORST ANDST SHFT 5-119 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 344 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes The remainder resides in the first stack location Level 1 SHFT ANDST Level 2 Level 3 SHFT ANDST Level 4 Level 5 SHFT Level 6 SHFT Level 7 Level 8 5-120 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 345: Transcendental Functions (Dl260 Only)

    The Arc Sine Real instruction takes the inverse sine of the real ASINR number stored in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator. Both the original number and the result are in IEEE 32-bit format. 5-121 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 346 NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE format. You must use DirectSOFT for entering real numbers, using the LDR (Load Real) instruction. 5-122 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 347: Bit Operation Instructions

    Sum the number of bits in the accumulator set to “1” V1500 V1500 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V1500 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT ORST PREV PREV PREV 5-123 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 348 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 accumulator to V2010 and V2011 V2011 V2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT NDST SHFT SHFT NDST SHFT 5-124 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 349 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and V201 1 V2011 V2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-125 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 350 OUTD V1500 Copy the value in the Acc. accumulator to V1500 and V1501 9 C 1 4 V1501 V1500 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT INST# ANDST SHFT 5-126 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 351 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Acc. accumulator to V1500 and V1501 V1501 V1500 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT INST# SHFT 5-127 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 352 “1” in the accumulator to a 5 bit binary value V2010 Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to V2010 V2010 Binary value for 12. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT INST# SHFT 5-128 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 353 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 pattern in the accumulator and set the corresponding bit position to a “1” Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT INST# 5-129 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 354: Number Conversion Instructions (Accumulator)

    OUTD V2010 The Binary (HEX) value copied to Copy the binary data in the V2010 accumulator to V2010 and V2011 V2011 V2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT 5-130 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 355 Acc. OUTD V2010 The BCD value Copy the BCD value in the copied to accumulator to V2010 and V2011 V2011 V2010 V2010 and V2011 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT 5-131 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 356 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 Invert the binary bit pattern in the accumulator OUTD V2010 V2011 V2010 Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and V2011 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT 5-132 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 357 Takes a 10’s complement of the value in the accumulator OUTD V2010 V2011 V2010 Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and V2011 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT ANDST SHFT 5-133 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 358 Real Number Format OUTD V1500 The real number (HEX) value Copy the real value in the copied to V1500 V1501 V1500 accumulator to V1500 and V1501 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT INST# SHFT 5-134 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 359 Copy the real value in the V1501 V1500 accumulator to V1500 and V1501 The binary number copied to V1400 andheld ro rammer ey tro e S FT A DST S FT S FT 5-135 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 360 Take the sine of the number in SINR 0.7071067 the accumulator, which is in radians. Copy the value in the OUTD 0.7071067 accumulator to V2000 V2000 and V2001. 5-136 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 361 HEX table (V1600) is specified in the ASCII to HEX instruction. The table below lists valid ASCII values for ATH conversion. ASCII Values Valid for ATH Conversion ASCII Hex Value ASCII Value Hex Value 5-137 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 362 LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator. Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range V-memory All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56) 5-138 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 363 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes PREV SHFT ANDST SHFT ANDST SHFT The table below lists valid ASCII values for HTA conversion. ASCII Values Valid for HTA Conversion Hex Value ASCII Value Hex Value ASCII Value 5-139 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 364 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Copy the value in the accumulator to Y20- - Y57 Acc. Segment Labels Segment Labels Handheld Programmer Keystrokes ANDST SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-140 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 365 0000000001 0001 V2010 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes 0000000011 0002 0000000010 0003 0000000110 0004 SHFT ANDST 0000000111 0005 SHFT 0000000101 0006 0000000100 0007 SHFT • • • • • • 1000000001 1022 1000000000 1023 5-141 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 366 The digits are shuffled and the result resides in the accumulator. Specified order (accumulator) Bit Positions B C E Result (accumulator) 5-142 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 367 B C E E D A V2010 V2011 V2010 V2011 V2010 V2011 V2010 Copy the value in the accumulator to V2010 and V2011 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT ANDST SHFT 5-143 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 368 V2002 V2032 Copy the specified table V2003 V2033 locations to a table V2030 beginning at location V2030 V2004 V2034 V2005 V2035 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes V2006 V2036 V2007 V2037 A DS A DS 5-144 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 369 When an offset is outside of the source information boundaries, then unknown data values will be transferred into the destination table. 5-145 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 370 When an offset is outside of the source information boundaries, then unknown data values will be transferred into the destination table. 5-146 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 371 V-memory to beyond the end of the DLBL area, then anything after the specified DLBL area will be replaced with invalid instructions. 5-147 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 372 SP53 the table NOTE: Status flags are only valid until the end of the scan or another instruction that uses the same flag is executed. 5-148 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. B...
  • Page 373 O 3000 accumulator. This is the table beginning. Set bit 34 (octal) in the table SETBIT to a ”1”. O 34 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT PREV ANDST SHFT ANDST SHFT NEXT 5-149 5-149 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 374 O 1600 value into the accumulator V1400 V1601 V1602 Fill the table with the value FILL V1603 in V1400 V1400 V1604 V1605 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT PREV ANDST SHFT ANDST SHFT ANDST ANDST 5-150 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 375 Load instruction. The value to be found in the table is specified in the Find instruction. If a value is found equal to the search value, the offset (from the starting location of the table) where the value is located will reside in the accumulator. 5-151 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 376 Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator. 5-152 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 377 V1407 300 and load the value into the accumulator FDGT K8989 Find the value in the table greater than the specified value Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT PREV ANDST SHFT ANDST SHFT NEXT 5-153 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 378 The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resets when the table length is reached. At first glance it may appear that the pointer should reset to 0. However, it resets to 1, not 0. 5-154 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 379 The logic shown here is not required, it’s just Since Special Relays are reset at the end of the scan, an optional method. this latch must follow the TTD instruction in the program. 5-155 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 380 Table Pointer (Resets to 1, not 0) V1400 V1400 V1401 V1401 V1402 V1402 Destination Destination V1403 V1403 V1500 V1500 V1404 V1404 V1405 V1405 SP56 SP56 V1406 V1406 SP56 = OFF SP56 = OFF V1407 V1407 5-156 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 381 The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. It is not set automatically. You have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program. 5-157 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 382 Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and load the value into 300 and load the value into the accumulator. This is the the accumulator. This is the table pointer location. table pointer location. 5-158 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 383 Destination Destination V1403 V1403 V1500 V1500 V1404 V1404 V1405 V1405 SP56 SP56 V1406 V1406 SP56 = OFF SP56 = ON V1407 V1407 until end of scan or next instruction that uses SP56 5-159 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 384 — another instruction that uses the same flag is executed, or — the end of the scan The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resets to 1 automatically when the table length is reached. 5-160 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 385 (PD) to move 1 value each time the input O 1400 contact transitions from low to high. Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and load the value into the accumulator. This is the starting table location. 5-161 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 386 Table Pointer (Resets to 1, not 0) V1400 V1400 V1401 V1401 V1402 V1402 Source Source V1403 V1403 V1500 V1500 V1404 V1404 V1405 V1405 SP56 SP56 V1406 V1406 SP56 = OFF SP56 = OFF V1407 V1407 5-162 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 387 The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. It is not set automatically. You have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program. 5-163 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 388 O 1400 Convert octal 1400 to HEX 300 and load the value into the accumulator. This is the table pointer location. 5-164 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 389 Destinatio Destination V1403 V1403 V1500 V1500 V1404 V1404 V1405 V1405 SP56 SP56 V1406 V1406 SP56 = OFF SP56 = ON V1407 V1407 until end of scan or next instruction that uses SP56 5-165 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 390 The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. It is not set automatically. You have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program. 5-166 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 391 (PD) to add one value each time the Convert octal 1400 to HEX input contact transitions from low to high. 300 and load the value into the accumulator. This is the starting table location. 5-167 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 392 V1403 V1403 V1500 V1500 V1404 V1404 V1405 V1405 SP56 SP56 V1406 V1406 SP56 = OFF SP56 = V1407 V1407 until end of scan or next instruction Discard Bucket that uses SP56 3074 5-168 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 393 Flag 67 will be set if the last bit shifted (just before it is discarded) is a “1”. Operand Data Type DL260 Range V-memory All (See page 3-56) 5-169 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 394 This is the table beginning. Do a table shift right by 12 TSHFR bits, which is 14 octal. O 14 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT PREV ANDST SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT NEXT 5-170 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 395 LDA instruction. Then we load the data into the accumulator to be ANDed with the table. In the ANDMOV command, we specify the table destination, V3100. 5-171 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 396 SHFT key and spell “XORMOV” explicitly. V 3000 V 3100 X OR MOV 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 K 3333 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 5-172 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 397 V2017 V2020 16 words Table 2 Start Addr. V2037 V2040 V3000 16 words Table 3 Block 32 bytes V2057 V3017 O2777 O2000 V2760 Table 32 16 words V2777 FINDB V3000 End Addr. 5-173 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 398 Swap the contents of the SWAP table in the previous V 3100 instruction with the one at V3100. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT PREV ANDST SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT ANDN 5-174 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 399: Clock/Calendar Instructions

    V2000 Set the date in the CPU using the value in V2000 and 2001 Year Month Day Day of Week Handheld Programmer Keystrokes NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT SHFT PREV ANDST SHFT SHFT 5-175 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 400 V2000 Set the time in the CPU using the value in V2000 and V2001 Hour Minutes Seconds Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Used NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT SHFT PREV ANDST SHFT SHFT SHFT ORST 5-176 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 401: Cpu Control Instructions

    Used DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes HPP Used SP45 SHFT STRN STOP SHFT SHFT INST# SP45 will turn on if there is an I/O module failure. 5-177 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 402 In the following example, the CPU scan timer will be reset to 0 when the RSTWT instruction is executed. See the For/Next instruction for a detailed example. DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDN RSTWT 5-178 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 403: Program Control Instructions

    LBL instruction (designated with the same constant Kaaa value) will be skipped. The instructions being skipped will not be executed by the CPU. DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT GOTO SHFT INST# INST# SHFT SHFT ANDST ANDST 5-179 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 404 Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range V-memory All (See page 3 - 54) All (See page 3 - 55) All (See page 3 - 56) Constant 1-9999 1-9999 1-9999 5-180 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 405 The RSTWT instruction is not necessary if the For/Next loop does not extend the scan time larger the Watchdog Timer setting. For more information on the Watchdog Timer, refer to the RSTWT instruction. DirectSOFT RSTWT NEXT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT INST# SHFT ANDN SHFT SHFT 5-181 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 406 250-1 implement a conditional return from the subroutine. The Subroutine Return (RT) is still required for termination of the Subroutine. Used HPP Used 5-182 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 407 CPU will return to the main body of the program. DirectSOFT OUTI OUTI RSTI Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT STRN SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-183 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 408 Subroutine Label K3 and the ladder logic in the subroutine will be executed. The CPU will return to the main body of the program after the RT instruction is executed. Direct SOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-184 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 409 When contact X0 is ON, logic under the first MLS will be executed. When contact X0 and X2 are ON, logic under the second MLS will be executed. The MLR instructions note the end of the Master Control area. 5-185 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 410 X0 is on. The logic between the MLS K2 (C) and MLR K1 (D) will function only if input X10 and X0 is on. The last rung is not controlled by either of the MLS coils. DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT SHFT 5-186 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 411: Interrupt Instructions

    DL240/250-1/260 Hardware Interrupt Input Interrupt Routine Interrupt Input Interrupt Routine X0 (cannot be used along V7634 sets interrupt time INT 0 INT 0 with s/w interrupt) INT 1 INT 2 INT 3 5-187 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 412 (before the End instruction) to disable both DISI hardware or software interrupts. Once the coil has been energized, interrupts will be disabled until they are enabled by the Enable Interrupt 250-1 instruction. Used HPP Used 5-188 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 413 The CPU will return to the main body of the program after the IRT instruction is executed. DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT STRN SHFT DISI SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SHFT SETI SHFT SETI 5-189 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 414 SHFT SHFT * The value entered, 3-999, must be followed by the digit 4 to complete the instruction. SETI RSTI NOTE: Only one software interrupt is allowed and it must be Int0. 5-190 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 415: Intelligent I/O Instructions

    ANDST in the intelligent module SHFT PREV ANDST V1400 is the starting location SHFT PREV ANDST in the CPU where the V1400 specified data will be stored SHFT 5-191 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 416 V1400 is the starting SHFT PREV location in the CPU where ANDST V1400 the specified data will be written from SHFT PREV ANDST SHFT PREV ANDST SHFT ANDN 5-192 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 417: Network Instructions

    0-1777 Outputs 0-477 0-777 0-1777 Control Relays 0-377 0-1777 0-3777 Stage 0-777 0-1777 0-1777 Timer 0-177 0-377 0-377 Counter 0-177 0-177 0-377 Global I/O GX/GY 0-3777 Special Relay 0-137 540-617 0-777 0-777 5-193 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 418 V2000 is the starting location in the Slave CPU where the specified data will be read from Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDN STRN SHFT SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT ANDST SHFT ANDST SHFT 5-194 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 419 0-1777 Outputs 0-477 0-777 0-1777 Control Relays 0-377 0-1777 0-3777 Stage 0-777 0-1777 0-1777 Timer 0-177 0-377 0-377 Counter 0-177 0-177 0-377 Global I/O GX/GY 0-3777 Special Relay 0-137 540-617 0-777 0-777 5-195 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 420 V2000 is the starting location in the Slave CPU where the specified data will be written to. Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDN STRN SHFT SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT ANDST INST# SHFT SHFT ANDN 5-196 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 421: Message Instructions

    EEPROM. Make sure you consider the instruction execution times (shown in Appendix C) if you are attempting to use the FAULT instructions in applications that require faster than normal execution cycles. 5-197 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 422 HEX ASCII for a blank is 20, a 1 is 31, 4 is 34 ...) DirectSOFT FAULT SW 146 DLBL ACON A SW NCON K 2031 NCON K 3436 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT ANDST SHFT SHFT ANDST ANDST SHFT INST# ANDN SHFT INST# SHFT INST# 5-198 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 423 Two digits 250-1 can be stored in an NCON instruction. Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range Constant 0-FFFF 0-FFFF 0-FFFF 0-FFFF Used HPP Used 5-199 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 424 See the FAULT instruction for information on displaying messages. DirectSOFT DLBL ACON A SW NCON K 2031 NCON K 3436 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes SHFT SHFT ANDST ANDST SHFT INST# ANDN SHFT INST# SHFT INST# 5-200 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 425 Then click the button indicated to send the Port 2 configuration to the CPU, and click Close. See Chapter 3 for port wiring information to connect your printer to the DL250- 1/260. 5-201 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 426 / line feed on the printer. This prepares the printer to print the next line, starting from the left margin. PRINT Print the message to Port 2 when X1 makes an off-to-on transition. “Hello, this is a PLC message.$N” 5-202 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 427 Example: V2000 % 16 16 characters in V2000 to V2007 are printed. V2000 % 0 The characters in V2001 to Vxxxx (determined by the number in V2000) will be printed. 5-203 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 428 NOTE: You must use the appropriate special relay in conjunction with the PRINT command to ensure the ladder program does not try to PRINT to a port that is still busy from a previous PRINT or WX or RX instruction. 5-204 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 429: Modbus Rtu Instructions (Dl260)

    • Number of Elements: specifies how many coils, inputs, holding registers or input registers will be read. See the table on the following page. • Modbus Data Format: specifies Modbus 584/984 or 484 data format to be used. 5-205 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 430 DL260 Range Inputs 0-1777 Outputs 0-1777 Control Relays 0-3777 Stage Bits 0-1777 Timer Bits 0-377 Counter Bits 0-377 Special Relays 0-777 V-memory all (see page 3-56) Global Inputs 0-3777 Global Outputs 0-3777 5-206 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 431 Slave Address: 01 - Read Coil Status Function Code: Start Slave Memory Address: Start Master Memory Address: Number of Elements: 584/984 Mode Modbus Data Type: Exception Response Buffer: V400 Instruction Interlock Bit C100 5-207 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 432: Modbus Write To Network (Mwx)

    • Number of Elements: specifies how many consecutive coils or registers will be written to. This field is only active when either function code 15 or 16 is selected • Modbus Data Format: specifies Modbus 584/984 or 484 data format to be used 5-208 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 433 DL260 Range Inputs 0-1777 Outputs 0-1777 Control Relays 0-3777 Stage Bits 0-1777 Timer Bits 0-377 Counter Bits 0-377 Special Relays 0-777 V-memory all (see page 3-56) Global Inputs 0-3777 Global Outputs 0-3777 5-209 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 434 05 - Force Single Coil Function Code: Start Slave Memory Address: 40001 V2000 Start Master Memory Address: Number of Elements: 584/984 Mode Modbus Data Type: V400 Exception Response Buffer: Instruction Interlock Bit C100 5-210 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 435: Ascii Instructions (Dl260)

    Additionally, if a DL260 PLC is a master on a network, the Network Write instruction (WX) can be used to write embedded ASCII data to an HMI or slave device directly from V–memory via a supported communications protocol using port 2, H2–ECOM or D2–DCM module. 5-211 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 436 ASCII data can be received as a fixed number of bytes or as a variable length string with a 250-1 specified termination character(s). Other features include Byte Swap preferences, Character Timeout, and user-defined flag bits for Busy, Complete and Timeout Error. Used 5-212 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 437 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid SP116 On when CPU port 2 is communicating with another device SP117 On when CPU port 2 has experienced a communication error 5-213 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 438 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions AIN Fixed Length Examples Fixed Length example when the PLC is reading the port continuously and timing is not critical. Fixed Length example when character to character timing is critical. 5-214 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 439 • Inter–character Timeout Error Bit: is set when the Character Timeout is exceed. See Character Timeout explanation above. • First Character Timeout Error Bit: is set when the First Character Timeout is exceeded. See First Character Timeout explanation above. 5-215 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 440 All V-memory (See page 3-56) Max. Variable Length K1-128 Bits: Busy, Complete, Timeout Error, Overflow C0-3777 AIN Variable Length Example AIN Variable Length example used to read barcodes on boxes (PE = photoelectric sensor). 5-216 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 441 K0-127 Found Index All V-memory (See page 3-56) Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction. SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid. 5-217 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 442 High V3002 Search start Index Number High V3003 High V3004 Forward Direction Search High V3005 High Beginning Index Number V3006 High End Index Number V3007 High Found Index Number = 0012 V4000 5-218 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 443 When an AIN instruction has executed, its Complete bit can be used to trigger an AFIND instruction to search for a desired portion of the ASCII string. Once the string is found, the AEX instruction can be used to extract the located string. 5-219 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 444 See the previous page for an example using the AEX instruction. Discrete Bit Flags Description SP53 On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction. SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid. 5-220 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 445 The CMPV instruction executes when the AIN instruction is complete. If the compared V–memory tables are equal, SP61 will turn ON. AIN Complete CMPV "Compare from" Starting Address: V3400 "Compare to" Starting Address: V3500 Number of Bytes: Strings are equal SP61 5-221 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 446 2 _Date:e European standard (day/month/2 digit year) 3 _Date:a Asian standard (2 digit year/month/day) 4 _Time:12 standard 12 hour clock (0-12 hour:min am/pm) 5 _Time:24 standard 24 hour clock (0-23 hour:min am/pm) 5-222 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 447 Character Code Description Suppresses leading spaces 2 C0 Converts leading spaces to zeros Suppresses leading zeros Example with V2000 = 0018 (binary format) Number of Characters V-memory Register with Modifier V2000 V2000:B V2000:B0 5-223 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 448 Prints the status of C100 in TRUE/FALSE format C100 : ON/OFF Prints the status of C100 in ON/OFF format V2000.15 : BOOL Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000 in TRUE/FALSE format 5-224 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 449 $” Double quotation (“) $L or $l Line feed (LF) $N or $n Carriage return line feed (CRLF) $P or $p Form feed $R or $r Carriage return (CR) $T or $t 5-225 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 450 Delay for VPRINT to complete PRINTV CPU/DCM Slot: Port Number: Delay for VPRINT to complete Start Address: V4000 Number of Bytes: Append: 0D (hexadecimal) Byte Swap: None Busy: Complete: Delay permissive for VPRINT 5-226 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 451 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid. SP116 On when CPU port 2 is communicating with another device. SP117 On when CPU port 2 has experienced a communication error. 5-227 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 452 B C D E High 0005h V2000 V2001 V2002 V2003 A D C E Byte Swap All but Null Byte B C D E High 0005h V2000 V2001 V2002 V2003 A D C E 5-228 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 453 ASCII receive buffer of the specified communications port number. Port Number: must be DL260 port 2 (K2) 250-1 Used ACRB Example The AIN Complete bit or the AIN diagnostic bits are used to clear the ASCII buffer. 5-229 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

  • Page 454: Intelligent Box (Ibox) Instructions (Dl250-1/Dl260 Only)

    The D2-250-1 CPU requires firmware version v4.60 or later, and the D2-260 CPU requires firmware version v2.40 or later. For more information on DirectSOFT or to download our free version, please visit our Web site at: www.automationdirect.com. Analog Helper IBoxes...
  • Page 455 CTRIO Write File to ROM (CTRWFTR) IB-1006 5-368 NOTE: Check your CPU firmware version using DirectSOFT: PLC Menu > Diagnostics > System Information. The latest firmware and update tool are available from: http://support.automationdirect.com/firmware/index.html 5-231 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 456 Binary). • Output Data Address: specifies the starting V-memory location that will be used to source the analog output data. NOTE The ANLGCMB instruction does not currently support the F2-8AD4DA-1 or F2-8AD4DA-2. 5-232 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 457 Number of Input Channels ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K K1-8 Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K BCD: K0; Binary: K1 Input Data Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Number of Output Channels ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K K1-8 Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K BCD: K0; Binary: K1 Output Data Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V...
  • Page 458 Slot # ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-7 Number of Input Channels ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-8 Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K BCD: K0; Binary: K1 Input Data Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words 5-234 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 459 NOTE: An Analog I/O IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters. 5-235 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 460 Slot # ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-7 Number of Output Channels ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-8 Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K BCD: K0; Binary: K1 Output Data Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words 5-236 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 461 NOTE: An Analog I/O IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters. 5-237 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 462 • Engineering (BCD): specifies the V-memory location where the scaled engineering BCD value will be placed ANSCL Example Parameter DL205 Range Raw (0-4095 BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words High Engineering ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-9999 Low Engineering ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-9999 Engineering (BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P...
  • Page 463 • Engineering (binary): specifies the V-memory location where the scaled engineering decimal value will be placed ANSCLB Example Parameter DL205 Range Raw (12-bit binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words High Engineering ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-65535 Low Engineering ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-65535 Engineering (binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P...
  • Page 464 Filter Frequency Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T T0-377 Filter Frequency Time (0.01 sec) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-9999 Raw Data (BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Filter Divisor (1-100) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-100 Filtered Value (BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words 5-240 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev.
  • Page 465 2. A larger value will increase the smoothing effect of the filter. A value of 1 results with no filtering. The filtered value will be placed in V2100. 5-241 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 466 Filter Frequency Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T T0-377 Filter Frequency Time (0.01 sec) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-9999 Raw Data (Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Filter Divisor (1-100) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-100 Filtered Value (Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words 5-242 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev.
  • Page 467 The filter constant is set to 3. A larger value will increase the smoothing effect of the filter. A value of 1 results with no filtering. The filtered value will be placed in V2100 5-243 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 468 Monitoring Value (BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words High-High Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-9999; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words High-High Alarm ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL205 V-memory map High Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-9999;...
  • Page 469 Both bits would be on in this case. The Low and Low-Low limits and alarms can be set to the same value if one “Low” limit or alarm is desired to be used. 5-245 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 470 Monitoring Value (Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words High-High Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-65535; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words High-High Alarm ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL205 V-memory map High Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-65535;...
  • Page 471 C103 will turn on. Both bits would be on in this case. The Low and Low-Low limits and alarms can be set to the same V-memory location/value if one “Low” limit or alarm is desired to be used. 5-247 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 472 “turning off” by the Off Delay Time. Parameter DL205 Range Timer Number ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T T0-377 Off Delay Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K,V K0-9999; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Output⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL205 V-memory map 5-248 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 473 When C100 turns on, C20 turns on and will remain on while C100 is on. When C100 turns off, C20 will remain on for the specified Off Delay Time (5 secs), and then turn off. Example timing diagram C100 5 sec 5 sec 5-249 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 474 • Output: specifies the output that will be delayed “turning on” by the On Delay Time. Parameter DL205 Range Timer Number ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T T0-377 On Delay Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K,V K0-9999; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Output⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL205 V-memory map 5-250 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 475 C21. Timer 1 (T1) is set to 2 seconds, the “on-delay” period. When C101 turns on, C21 is delayed turning on by 2 seconds. When C101 turns off, C21 turns off immediately. Example timing diagram C101 2 sec 2 sec 5-251 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 476 C0 goes from an off to on transition. The input logic must produce an off to on transition to execute the One Shot instruction. Example Timing Diagram Scan time C100 5-252 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 477 C10 is pressed again, C20 turns off. C100 is an internal bit used by the instruction. No permissive contact or input logic is used with this instruction NOTE: Neither a permissive nor input logic is required with this instruction. 5-253 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 478 “From WORD” will be moved Parameter DL205 Range From WORD ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K K0-FFFF; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words To WORD ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words MOVEW Example In the following example, the MOVEW instruction is used to move 16 bits of data from V2000 to V3000 when C100 turns on.
  • Page 479 “From DWORD” will be moved Parameter DL205 Range From DWORD ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K K0-FFFFFFFF; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words To DWORD ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words MOVED Example In the following example, the MOVED instruction is used to move 32 bits of data from V2000 and V2001 to V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on.
  • Page 480 Real number will be placed Parameter DL205 Range Value (WORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K K0-9999; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Number of Decimal Points ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-4 Result (DWORD REAL)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words...
  • Page 481 Real number will be placed Parameter DL205 Range Value (DWORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K K0-99999999; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Number of Decimal Points ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-8 Result (DWORD REAL)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words...
  • Page 482 • Expression: specifies the mathematical expression to be executed and the result is stored in specified Result (WORD). Each V-memory location used in the expression must be in BCD format. Parameter DL205 Range WORD Result ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Expression ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Text 5-258 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 483 In the following example, the MATHBCD instruction is used to calculate the math expression which multiplies the BCD value in V1200 by 1000, then divides by 4095 and loads the resulting value in V2000 when C100 turns on. 5-259 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 484 • Expression: specifies the mathematical expression to be executed and the result is stored in specified Result (WORD). Each V-memory location used in the expression must be in binary format. Parameter DL205 Range WORD Result ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Expression ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Text 5-260 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 485 In the following example, the MATHBIN instruction is used to calculate the math expression which multiplies the Binary value in V1200 by 1000 then divides by 4095 and loads the resulting value in V2000 when C100 turns on. 5-261 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 486 Result (DWORD) location. Each V-memory location used in the expression must be in Real format. Parameter DL205 Range DWORD Result ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Expression ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Text MATHR Example In the following example, the MATHR instruction is used to calculate the math expression which multiplies the REAL (floating point) value in V1200 by 10.5 then divides by 2.7 and...
  • Page 487 BCD value will be placed Parameter DL205 Range Value (DWORD Real) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V,P,R R ; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Number of Decimal Points ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-4 Result (WORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words...
  • Page 488 DWORD BCD value will be placed Parameter DL205 Range Value (DWORD Real) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V,P,R R ; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Number of Decimal Points ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-8 Result (DWORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words...
  • Page 489 Parameter DL205 Range Value (WORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K K0-9999 ; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Result (DWORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words SQUARE Example In the following example, the SQUARE instruction is used to square the 4-digit BCD value in...
  • Page 490 Parameter DL205 Range Value (WORD Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K K0-65535; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Result (DWORD Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words SQUAREB Example In the following example, the SQUAREB instruction is used to square the single-word Binary value in V2000 and store the 8-digit double-word Binary result in V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on.
  • Page 491 Parameter DL205 Range Value (REAL DWORD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V,P,R R ; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Result (REAL DWORD)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words SQUARER Example In the following example, the SQUARER instruction is used to square the 32-bit floating point REAL value in V2000 and V2001 and store the REAL value result in V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on.
  • Page 492 V-memory BCD values will be placed Parameter DL205 Range Start Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words End Address (inclusive) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Result (DWORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words...
  • Page 493 V-memory binary values will be placed Parameter DL205 Range Start Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words End Address (inclusive) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Result (DWORD Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words...
  • Page 494 Real values will be placed Parameter DL205 Range Start Address (DWORD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words End Address (inclusive DWORD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Result (DWORD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words 5-270 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev.
  • Page 495 In the following example, the SUMR instruction is used to total the sum of all floating point REAL number values in words V2000 thru V2007 and store the resulting 32-bit floating point REAL number value in V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on. 5-271 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 496 ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Slot ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-7 Status ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Msg Buffer (65 words used) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words 5-272 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev.
  • Page 497 NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters. 5-273 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 498 Code will be written Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words 5-274 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev.
  • Page 499 DHCP will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000 for the specific error code. 5-275 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 500 DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Timeout (sec) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K5-127 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words 5-276 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev.
  • Page 501 DHCP Server and is assigned a valid IP Address. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000 for the specific error code. 5-277 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 502 DHCP Enabled bit state to confirm a successful module query. Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map DHCP Enabled ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B...
  • Page 503 The command to read (Query) whether DHCP is enabled or not will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. 5-279 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 504 IN the ECOM100, and keep the To: field small (or even empty), to leave more room for the Subject: and Body: fields. In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the ECOM100 circuit board. 5-280 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 505 EMail message Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map To: ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 506 SP Slot Error - the SP error bit for the ECOM100’s slot turned on. Possibly using RX or WX instructions on the ECOM100 and walking on the ECEMAIL execution. Use should use ECRX and ECX IBoxes, 5-282 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 507 Command not implemented Bad sequence of commands Command parameter not implemented <domain> does not accept mail Access denied. Must issue a STARTTLS command first. Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism. Continued next page 5-283 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 508 Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism. Requested action not taken; mailbox unavailable. User not local; please try <forward path> Requested mail action aborted; exceeded storage allocation Requested action not taken; mailbox name not allowed. Transaction failed 5-284 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 509 If the EMail is sent, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000 for the SMTP error code or other possible error codes. 5-285 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 510 • Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V...
  • Page 511 Rung 2: Whenever an EStop is pushed, ensure that the president of the company gets copies of all Emails being sent. The ECOM100 EMail Setup IBox allows you to set/change the SMTP Email settings stored in the ECOM100. (Example continued on next page) 5-287 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 512 ECEMSUP IBox). If successful, turn on C102. If there is a failure, turn on C103. If it fails, you can look at V2001 for the specific error code. 5-288 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 513 • Sender Name: optional parameter that specifies the sender name that will appear in the “From:” field to those who receive the e-mail. • Sender EMail: optional parameter that specifies the sender EMail address that will appear in the “From:” field to those who receive the e-mail. 5-289 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 514 • Cc: optional parameter that specifies a list of “carbon copy” Email addresses to send all EMails to. Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V...
  • Page 515 (Example continued on next page) NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters. 5-291 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 516 If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000 for the specific error code. Rung 3: Once the EStop is pulled out, take the president off the cc: list by restoring the default EMail setup in the ECOM100. 5-292 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 517 • Gateway Address: specifies the Gateway Address for the module to use. Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words IP Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠IP Address...
  • Page 518 IBox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000 for the specific error code. 5-294 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 519 Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Description ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Num Chars ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 520 The command to read the module description will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. 5-296 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 521 4 consecutive V-memory locations. Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Gateway IP Address (4 Words) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V...
  • Page 522 The command to read the Gateway Address will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. 5-298 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 523 V-memory locations Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map IP Address (4 Words) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V...
  • Page 524 The command to read the IP Address will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. 5-300 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 525 • Module ID: specifies the location where the ECOM100’s Module ID (decimal) will be placed Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Module ID⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V...
  • Page 526 The command to read the module ID will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. 5-302 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 527 • Num Chars: specifies the number of characters (bytes) to read from the ECOM100’s Name field. Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Module Name ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Num Chars ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 528 The command to read the module name will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. 5-304 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 529 V-memory locations. Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Subnet Mask (4 Words) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V...
  • Page 530 The command to read the Subnet Mask will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. 5-306 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 531 • Description: specifies the Description that will be written to the module Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Description ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 532 IBox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000 for the specific error code. 5-308 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 533 • Gateway Address: specifies the Gateway IP Address that will be written to the module Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Gateway Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 534 If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000 for the specific error code. To configure all of the ECOM100 TCP/IP parameters in one IBox, see the ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox. 5-310 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 535 Error Code will be written Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words IP Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 536 If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000 for the specific error code. To configure all of the ECOM100 TCP/IP parameters in one IBox, see the ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox. 5-312 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 537 • Module ID: specifies the Module ID that will be written to the module Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Module ID ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 538 IBox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000 for the specific error code. 5-314 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 539 • Module Name: specifies the Name that will be written to the module. Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Module Name ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 540 IBox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000 for the specific error code. 5-316 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 541 • Subnet Mask: specifies the Subnet Mask that will be written to the module. Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Subnet Mask ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 542 If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000 for the specific error code. To configure all of the ECOM100 TCP/IP parameters in one IBox, see the ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox. 5-318 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 543 • Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not completed successfully Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Slave ID ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-90 From Slave Element (Src) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,V See DL205 V-memory map Number of Bytes ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-128 To Master Element (Dest) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 544 (Example continued on next page) NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters. 5-320 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 545 Using the ECRX and ECWX for all of your ECOM100 network reads and writes is the fastest the PLC can do networking. For local Serial Ports, DCM modules, or the original ECOM modules, use the NETCFG and NETRX/NETWX IBoxes. 5-321 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 546 Parameter DL205 Range ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Slave ID ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-90 From Master Element (Src) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Number of Bytes ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-128 To Slave Element (Dest) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,V...
  • Page 547 V402-502 NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters. 5-323 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 548 Using the ECRX and ECWX for all of your ECOM100 network reads and writes is the fastest the PLC can do networking. For local Serial Ports, DCM modules, or the original ECOM modules, use the NETCFG and NETRX/NETWX IBoxes. 5-324 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 549 • Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction Parameter DL205 Range Network# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 CPU Port or Slot ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-FF Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words 5-325 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 550 NOTE: The Network Configuration IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters. 5-326 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 551 • Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not completed successfully. Parameter DL205 Range Network# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Slave ID ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K,V K0-90 From Slave Element (Src) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,V See DL205 V-memory map Number of Bytes ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-128 To Master Element (Dest) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 552 NOTE: The Network Configuration IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters. 5-328 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 553 Using the NETRX and NETWX for all of your serial port, DCM, or original ECOM network reads and writes is the fastest the PLC can do networking. For ECOM100 modules, use the ECOM100 and ECRX/ECWX IBoxes. 5-329 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 554 • Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not completed successfully Parameter DL205 Range Network# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Slave ID ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K,V K0-90 From Master Element (Src) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Number of Bytes ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-128 To Slave Element (Dest) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,V...
  • Page 555 NOTE: The Network Configuration IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters. 5-331 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 556 Using the NETRX and NETWX for all of your serial port, DCM, or original ECOM network reads and writes is the fastest the PLC can do networking. For ECOM100 modules, use the ECOM100 and ECRX/ECWX IBoxes. 5-332 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 557 • Word Output (EBC base): The starting output V-memory address as defined by the I/O configuration in the ERM Workbench • Bit Output (EBC base): The starting output Bit address as defined by the I/O configuration in the ERM Workbench 5-333 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 558 CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Slot ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-7 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Input (Word, Bit) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,B See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Output (Word, Bit) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,B See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words CTRIO Example (local base) Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO module in slot 2 of the local base.
  • Page 559 CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3 Entry Type ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-5; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Pulse Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-65535; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Preset Count ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-2147434528; See DL205 V-memory map Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 560 #0, then turn encoder to value of 10+ (output #0 should turn on) and then continue on to count of 20+ (output #0 should turn off). (Example continued on next page) 5-336 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 561 CTRADPT Example (cont’d) Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic. Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code. 5-337 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 562 DL205 Range CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map 5-338 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 563 C1, enable C0 to execute CTRCLRT command to clear the preset table, turn on C2 to enable output #0, then turn encoder to value of 10+ (output #0 should NOT turn on). 5-339 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 564 CTRCLRT Example (cont’d) Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic. Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code. 5-340 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 565 • Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction • Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed • Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully 5-341 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 566 CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3 Table# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-255; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Entry# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-255; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Entry Type ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-5; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Pulse Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-65535;...
  • Page 567 30 (output #0 should turn off). Note that we must also reload the profile after changing the preset(s); this is why the CTRLDPR command follows the CTREDPT command in this example. 5-343 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 568 CTREDPT Example (cont’d) Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic. Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code. 5-344 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 569 • Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction • Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has completed successfully • Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully 5-345 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 570 CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3 Table# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-255; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Entry# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-255; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Entry Type ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-5; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Pulse Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-65535;...
  • Page 571 30+ and the output #0 light will turn off. Note that it is not necessary to reload this file separately, however, the command can only change one value at a time. (Example continued on next page) 5-347 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 572 CTREDRL Example (cont’d) Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic. Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code. 5-348 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 573 • Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has completed successfully • Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully 5-349 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 574 CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3 Entry Type ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-5; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Pulse Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-65535; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Preset Count ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-2147434528; See DL205 V-memory map Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 575 Now reset the counter with C1, enable C0 to execute CTRINPT command to create a single preset table with a preset to set output#0 at a count of 15, then turn encoder to value of 15+ (output #0 should turn on). 5-351 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 576 CTRINPT Example (cont’d) Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic. Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code. 5-352 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 577 • Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has completed successfully • Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully 5-353 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 578 CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3 Entry Type ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-5; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Pulse Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-65535; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Preset Count ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-2147434528; See DL205 V-memory map Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 579 C2 in Data View, turn encoder on CTRIO to value above 10 and output #0 light will come on. Now turn on C0 to execute the CTRINTR command, reset the counter with C1, then turn encoder to value of 25+ (output #0 should turn on). 5-355 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 580 CTRINTR Example (cont’d) Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic. Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code. 5-356 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 581 DL205 Range CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3 File# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-255; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B...
  • Page 582 Rung 2: This CTRIO Load Profile IBox will load File #1 into the working memory of Output 0 in CTRIO #1. This example program requires that you load CTRLDPR_IBox.cwb into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module. (Example continued on next page) 5-358 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 583 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions CTRLDPR Example (cont’d) Rung 3: If the file is loaded successfully, set Profile_Loaded. 5-359 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 584 • Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written Parameter DL205 Range CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words 5-360 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 585 BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters. Rung 2: This CTRIO Read Error Code IBox will read the Extended Error information from CTRIO #1. This example program requires that you load CTRRDER_IBox.cwb into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module. 5-361 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 586 • Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has completed successfully. • Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully. 5-362 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 587 CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3 Frequency ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K20-20000; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-FF; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Duty Cycle ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-99; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 588 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions CTRRTLM Example (cont’d) Rung 3: If the Run To Limit Mode parameters are OK, set the Direction Bit and Enable the output. 5-364 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 589 • Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction. • Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has completed successfully. • Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully. 5-365 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 590 DL205 Range CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3 Frequency ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K20-20000; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Duty Cycle ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-99; See DL205 V-memory map Position ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-2147434528; See DL205 V-memory map Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 591 1500 is reached. This example program requires that you load CTRRTPM_IBox.cwb into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module. Rung 3: If the Run To Position Mode parameters are OK, set the Direction Bit and Enable the output. 5-367 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 592 DL205 Range CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3 Frequency ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K20-20000; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Duty Cycle ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-99; See DL205 V-memory map Step Count ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-2147434528; See DL205 V-memory map Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠...
  • Page 593 Rung 2: This CTRIO Velocity Mode IBox sets up Output #0 in CTRIO #1 to output 10,000 pulses at a Frequency of 1000 Hz. This example program requires that you load CTRVELO_ IBox.cwb into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module. 5-369 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 594 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions CTRVELO Example (cont’d) Rung 3: If the Velocity Mode parameters are OK, set the Direction Bit and Enable the output. 5-370 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 595 DL205 Range CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255 Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3 Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map 5-371 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 596 Rung 2: This CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry IBox will change Entry 0 in Table #2 to be a RESET at Count 3456. This example program requires that you load CTRWFTR_IBox.cwb into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module. (Example continued on next page) 5-372 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 597 CTRWFTR Example (cont’d) Rung 3: If the file is successfully editted, use a Write File To ROM IBox to save the edited table back to the CTRIO’s ROM, thereby making the changes retentive. 5-373 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...
  • Page 598 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions Notes: 5-374 DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D...

Table of Contents